DIP User Manual

e-terragridcom DIP
Teleprotection
USERS Manual
DIP/EN U/C23 V2.3
GRID
User's Manual e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN U/C23 Page 1/2
DIP Teleprotection CONTENT
Area Overview Safety Section Main Characteristics Installation Commissioning Maintenance Human Machine Interface Analogue Single Tone Human Machine Interface Analogue Dual Tone Human Machine Interface Digital
File name DIP_EN_OS_A23.pdf DIP_EN_SS_B23.pdf DIP_EN_IT_B23.pdf DIP_EN_IN_A23.pdf DIP_EN_CM_B23.pdf DIP_EN_MT_A23.pdf 1-DIP_EN_HI_A23.pdf 2-DIP_EN_HI_A23.pdf 3-DIP_EN_HI_B23.pdf
Reference DIP/EN OS/A23 DIP/EN SS/B23 DIP/EN IT/B23 DIP/EN IN/A23 DIP/EN CM/B23 DIP/EN MT/A23 DIP/EN HI/A23 DIP/EN HI/A23 DIP/EN HI/B23
DIP/EN U/B23 Page 2/2
User's Manual e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Overview e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN OS/A23
OVERVIEW
DIP/EN OS/A23 Page 1/6
CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
OVERVIEW
Safety Section Main Characteristics Installation Human machine Interface DIP DIGITAL Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE Commissioning Maintenance
5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
2.
DEFINITIONS
BLANK PAGE
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION A11 A22 A23 DATE 11/14/2007 08/14/2008 13/01/2011 COMMENTS ORIGINAL ISSUE PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2 Version 2.3
BLANK PAGE
1.
OVERVIEW
The DIP User manual includes eight sections: Safety section, Presentation, Installation, Human Machine Interface DIP DIGITAL , Human Machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE, Human Machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE, Commissioning, Maintenance.
1.1
Safety Section The Safety Section provides full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings.
1.2
Main Characteristics The Presentation Section provides full information on DIP DIGITAL and ANALOG features, equipment description, main characteristics and performances.
1.3
Installation The Installation Section provides full information on equipment description, shipment, environmental conditions, boards installation, power supply boards and VDC range, equipment connection.
1.4
Human machine Interface DIP DIGITAL The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirement, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI.
1.5
Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirements, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI (Single tone and dual tone modes).
1.6
Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirements, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI (Single tone and dual tone modes).
1.7
Commissioning The Commissioning Section provides full information on DIP commissioning, configuring hardware, testing and fault isolation during commissioning, checks.
1.8
Maintenance The Maintenance Section provides full information on DIP Maintenance, Testing and Fault isolation, firmware upgrade.
2.
DEFINITIONS
Summary of some of the terms and acronyms used in this manual Dependability - Ability of a Teleprotection link to issue a valid command in the presence of interference and or noise. For convenience, the probability of missing command Pmc is usually measured, the dependability is therefore given by 1 - Pmc. Security - Ability of a system to prevent interference or noise from generating a command state at the receiving end when no command is transmitted. For convenience, the probability of unwanted command Puc is usually measured, the security is then given by 1 - Puc. Nominal transmission time - The time elapsed between the moment of a change of state at the transmitter input and the moment of the corresponding change of state at the receiver output when there is no interference or noise. This time does not include propagation time. Guard - The guard signal is a signal that is transmitted to monitor the integrity of the teleprotection system and it effectively supervises the channel in terms of the signal quality. Other monitoring is also employed. When present, the guard signal inhibits any command output of the teleprotection receiver. Command signal - The command signal is a signal that is transmitted to produce a change of state at a remote location. The requirements for the command signal are dependent upon the type of scheme. Permissive trip - Protection schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification by local protection. Intertrip channels utilize similar principles to permissive trip channels, however, security against unwanted operation and dependability of correct operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements, particularly in analogue systems. Direct trip / Inter-trip - Protective schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification that are similar in operation to permissive trip with the exception that security against unwanted operation and dependability of correct operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements. Blocking - Protective schemes where the received command blocks the operation of local protection. These channels utilise similar principles to permissive trip channels; however dependability of operation and speed are prime requirements. . VF - Voice Frequency. DCE - Data Communication Equipment. DTE - Data Terminal Equipment. LF (AF) - Low Frequency. Signals transmitted in the 0-4 kHz base band. Also called Audio Frequency. FV - Guard Frequency. FC - Command Frequency. TMS Teleprotection Monitoring System. St = Single tone analog version. Dt = Dual tone analog version.
Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN SS/A23
SAFETY SECTION
DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 1/12
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR ALSTOM TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT

1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2
INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Symbols Labels
3 3 4
4 4
4. 5. 6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING, AND SERVICING DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Protective fuse rating Protective class Installation category Environment
4 6 7
7 7 7 7
BLANK PAGE
1.
INTRODUCTION
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning, and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes references to typical equipment label markings. The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipments rating label. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned, or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance, and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who: Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected; Are able to perform safely switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices; Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate ALSTOM technical sales office and request the necessary information.
3.
SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons, the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned.
3.1
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or subassembly, e.g. power supply. *NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2
Labels See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labelling information.
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING, AND SERVICING

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. Equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning, or servicing the equipment. The equipment and cabinet must be earthed as specified in IEC 60950-1. The equipment must be supplied over a circuit breaker for the power supply. The circuit breaker must be switched off. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning, and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. Do not work on the equipment or connecting cables during a lightning storm. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage; also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.
Before removing top cover, the isolating terminals of external cables must be opened or disconnected. Protection Class I Equipment: Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor be checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm (3.3 mm for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are prewired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the prewired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation); Protective fuse rating; Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable); Voltage and current rating of external wiring, suitable to the application.
It is important that this instruction manual be read and fully understood by all people involved, including personnel that has already undergone training and is otherwise qualified before changing configuration or carrying out maintenance. Otherwise the warranty will not be applicable. Accidental touching of exposed terminals If working in a restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided. Unused connectors in the equipment sub-racks should be terminated with blank plugs. Equipment use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. If the link gets disturbed while tuning, testing, simulating alarms, making measurements and loading new configurations, appropriate measures must be taken to prevent the protection signal transmission being used. Before switching on the circuit breaker, check that the equipment/cabinet is securely connected to the protective earth/ground and check the polarity and value of the power supply. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage. Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
5.
DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning.
Disposal It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses be avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
6.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipment is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible.
6.2
Protective class IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2005 ensure user safety. Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to
6.3
Installation category IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2005 Installation category II (Overvoltage Category II): Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 2,5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply independent circuits.
circuits and earth and also between 6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 - Operation up to 2000m IEC 60255-27:2005 EN 60255-27: 2005 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety Altitude standards.
SPECIFIC SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR DIP TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT
Personnel qualification: authorized and properly trained personnel only are admitted to carry out installing, programming, commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting, and operation of the equipment.
Technical specifications: the equipment must be operated within the technical specifications. Failure to do so may result in personal injuries or equipment damage.
Alteration: alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
Insertion and removal of plug-in modules: neither removal nor insertion of modules, except for redundant power supply units, is permitted. Before inserting or removing modules, the power supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.
ESD protection: the modules in this equipment contain devices which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges. Appropriate measures must be taken before unpacking modules or removing them from equipment racks. Grounding straps for technical personnel and the provision of anti-static workbenches are essential precautions to prevent ESD damage when handling or working on modules. Modules may only be shipped either in their original packing or installed in equipment racks.
Mechanical installation: the equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
Cabinets which are not secured to the floor tip forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not open the hinged frame without precautions.
Electrical installation: this is Class I equipment as defined in EN 60255-27. The equipment and cubicle/cabinet shall be solidly bonded to the protective (earth) conductor for both safety and electromagnetic compatibility reasons. The equipment must be protected by circuit breakers or fuses with a maximum rating of 16 Amps.
All circuit breakers in the cabinet must be switch OFF before working on the equipment.
Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or from the equipment.
The isolating terminals of the external cables must be kept open during installation, maintenance and before storage, decommissioning, and disposal.
Ensure that all supply inputs have been isolated/switched off before installing the equipment.
When an analog DIP is connected to cables, pilot wires, or leased circuits, the equipment must only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers withstanding a 15kVrms or 20kVrms test voltage at 50Hz/60Hz for 1 mn, according to national regulations or electric utilities practice.
Fibre optic installation: Optical connectors: clean all optical connectors by an approved method before making any optical connection; do not rotate the optical connector unnecessarily when making an optical connection. When not connected, fit all optical plugs and couplings with protective caps.
Damage to optical fibres: when dressing fibres, take care not to exceed the minimum bend radius (typically 35mm) and do not over tighten binders used for dressing as damage may result.
Back cover: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels behind the back cover.
Working on the equipment: do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning.
Electrical strength test: do not repeat any electrical tests. Improper test methods can cause severe damage to the equipment. Electric strength and earth continuity tests have been performed in the factory.
EMC: this is class A equipment. In a domestic environment, this equipment may cause radio interference. In this case, the user may be required to take appropriate measures.
Power supply for alarm: this shall be protected against overcurrents and short circuit conditions.
Common interface UT148: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels on the module and the cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.
Relay interface SRxxx: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels on the module and the cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.
Laser / LED: take care using optical cards IR182/IR185, class I Laser/LED product.
Using HMI DIP : the teleprotection link can be disturbed while using certain maintenance functions of the DIP HMI (e.g. forcing commands).
During routine tests with the DIP in operation, Reset device in the menu should not be activated, as this causes the DIP to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for approximately 5 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.
Commissioning: do not close/establish any connections to protection devices until the DIP is properly commissioned.
Supervision network port P19 : As per as IEC 60950 compliancy, when voltage higher than 60 Vcc are involved in the DIP, the supervision network port P19 cannot be used as direct access HMI port, so no operation could be performed directly with a PC (please refer to Installation part chapter 8)
Input and Ouput Voltage : Inputs / outputs at very low voltage ( below 60 Vcc) are isolated from dangerous voltage by a main insulation, so the level of voltage are not guaranteed in case of equipment failure.
I/O connection : Inputs and outputs shall not be connected to equipment that may be used by an operator or service person. Only service persons are entitled to handle the equipment when voltage higher than 60 Vcc are involved.
Access to the equipment : In this equipment has been design for installation in the substation with an access strictly restricted to service persons or operators who have been informed of the safety rules and risk of intervention.
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN IT/B23
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
DIP/EN IT/B23 Page 1/44
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2. 3. 4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.7
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS DEFINITIONS OVERVIEW DIP GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES

Protection schemes managed Optional features Allocation of logical input commands Alarms Auto-tests Ease of use Customization HMI monitoring features Features of tests and maintenance. Accessories
6 7 8 9
10 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 14
5.
5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
DIGITAL MODE
Principle of digital transmission Interfaces available in the digital mode Digital interfaces managed IR185 optical fiber interface IR187 optical interfaces SFP modules Path redundancy. Optimizing the transmission medium Number of commands Applications Link control Maintenance and loopback
15
15 15 16 17 17 18 19 20 20 20 20 21
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
ANALOG MODE
Frequency coding of the single tone version Frequency coding of the dual tone version Description of the communication interface Characteristics specific to the analog mode
22
22 23 24 24
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.4.8 6.5 Transmission medium (all versions) Optimizing the single tone version Number of commands Single tone version Link test Unblocking feature Voltage presence External alarm input DIP connected to a PLC Characteristics specific to the analog mode in the dual tone version
DIP/EN IT/B23 Page 2/44 24 24 24 26 26 26 26 26 28
7. 8.
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.8 8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

Mechanical characteristics Environmental characteristics Electrical characteristics of the power supply Characteristics of the IRIG-B interface Operating characteristics Characteristics of digital transmission Characteristics of SFP modules Single mode unidirectional modules Single mode bidirectional modules Multimode unidirectional module Characteristics of voice frequency transmission General characteristics Band sharing - Single tone version Band sharing Dual tone version
29 31
31 32 33 33 34 37 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 40
9.
9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 9.1.4 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3
PERFORMANCE
Digital interfaces Maximum transfer time according to transmission speed Transfer time according to the IEEE C37-94 protocol Security Dependability Analog interface Single tone version Transmission time Security (bandwidth 300-3 400 Hz) Dependability (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz) Analog interface Dual tone version Transmission time Security (bandwidth 300- 1900 Hz) Dependability (bandwidth 300 - 1900 Hz)
41
41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 43
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 DIP ENVIRONMENT FIGURE 2 EXAMPLE OF LINK WITH E-TERRAGRIDCOM OCM 5000 FIGURE 3 DIGITAL INTERFACES FIGURE 4 UNIDIRECTIONAL MODULE FIGURE 5 BIDIRECTIONAL MODULE FIGURE 6 BIDIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION FIGURE 7 REDUNDANCY DIAGRAM FIGURE 8 LOOPBACK FIGURE 9 - TRANSMISSION SINGLE TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND FIGURE 10 - TRANSMISSION DUAL TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND FIGURE 11 VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE FIGURE 12 LINK TEST ANALOG MODE FIGURE 13 - EXAMPLE OF AUTOMATIC POWER PROCESS FIGURE 14 DIP RACK 9 14 16 18 18 19 19 21 22 23 24 26 27 29
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 LOG FUNCTION TABLE 2 CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES TABLE 3 CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES TABLE 4 DIP BOARDS TABLE 5 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS TABLE 6 ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS TABLE 7 POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS TABLE 8 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS TABLE 9 CHARACTERISTICS OF PREVIOUS VERSIONS TABLE 10 DIGITAL TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS TABLE 11 CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES TABLE 12 CHARACTERISTICS OF BIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES TABLE 13 CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL MM MODULES TABLE 14 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VOICE FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION TABLE 15 BAND SHARING SINGLE TONE VERSION TABLE 16 DUAL TONE VERSION FREQUENCIES TABLE 17 FREQUENCIES AND BANDWIDTH (DUAL TONE VERSION) TABLE 18 MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIMES FOR ELECTRICAL AND IR187 BOARDS TABLE 19 MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION DATA FOR THE IE185 BOARD WITH MUX TABLE 20 TRANSMISSION TIME SINGLE TONE VERSION TABLE 21 TRANSMISSION TIME DUAL TONE VERSION 11 22 23 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 38 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 43
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION A B C D11 E11 A22 B22 A23 B23 DATE 17/10/2000 18/04/2001 02/06/2004 14/11/2007 11/02/2008 23/08/2009 01/06/2010 29/11/2010 17/03/2011 COMMENTS Original issue Optical interface added Analog part added New features, new structure Minor corrections Software version 2.2 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 and optical interface IR187 Software version 2.3 Update of the transfer time with SR200 board
BLANK PAGE
1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1) SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45 SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1)
(1)
As per the option chosen
2.
DEFINITIONS
Summary of some of the terms and acronyms used in this manual Dependability - Ability of a Teleprotection link to issue a valid command in the presence of interference and or noise. For convenience, the probability of missing command Pmc is usually measured, the dependability is therefore given by 1 - Pmc. Security - Ability of a system to prevent interference or noise from generating a command state at the receiving end when no command is transmitted. For convenience, the probability of unwanted command Puc is usually measured, the security is then given by 1 - Puc. Nominal transmission time - The time elapsed between the moment of a change of state at the transmitter input and the moment of the corresponding change of state at the receiver output when there is no interference or noise. This time does not exclude the propagation time due to the transmission medium. Guard - The guard signal is a signal that is transmitted to monitor the integrity of the teleprotection system and it effectively supervises the channel in terms of the signal quality. Other monitoring methods are also employed. When present, the guard signal inhibits any command output of the teleprotection receiver Command signal - The command signal is a signal that is transmitted to produce a change of state at a remote location. The requirements for the command signal are dependent upon the type of scheme. Permissive tripping - Protection schemes where the received command initiates trip without qualification by local protection. Command channels of this type can run in a voice frequency band, a PLC frequency band or with a digital binary speed. The channel is often designed to provide high operating dependability, particularly when the telecommunication channel may be impacted, e.g. due to disturbance in the power supply. Direct tripping / Remote tripping - Protection schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification by local protection. These schemes are similar to permissive trip, except that requirements in terms of security against untimely commands and lack of faulty command are essential. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements, particularly in analogue systems. Blocking - Protective schemes where the received command blocks the operation of local protection. These channels use principles similar to permissive tripping channels. However, they have higher operating dependability and speed requirements. VF - Voice Frequency. DCE - Data Communication Equipment DTE - Data Terminal Equipment LF (AF) - Low Frequency. Signals transmitted in the 0-4 kHz base band. Also called Audio Frequency. GF - Guard Frequency CF - Command Frequency. SFP - Small form Factor Pluggable. WDM - Wave-length Division Multiplexing.
3.
OVERVIEW
ALSTOMs DIP equipment requires no maintenance, is easy to start up and offers high installation flexibility. The features described in this manual apply to the last product release. It may be monitored and managed remotely through a telecommunication network using different systems: Standard management system using the SNMP protocol, e.g. e-terra SENTINEL by ALSTOM. Remote access through a TCP/IP network.
The DIP teleprotection equipment is designed to run in harsh environment conditions, such as those encountered in relaying buildings of very high voltage stations. To this end, it is fitted with protections against electromagnetic disturbance (induced or radiated). Although intended mainly for the field of energy, the DIP teleprotection equipment is also used in all applications where the following criteria are imperative: Very short transfer times. Optimum dependability and safety. Immunity to disturbance from the electric environment.
The DIP unit also supports: Information coding ensuring, on the one hand compatibility with the standard transmission medium, on the other hand immunity to disturbance encountered on it. Advanced decoding and processing of signals received, allowing accurate restitution of the information transmitted.
4.
DIP GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES

The DIP equipment is composed of a broad range of interfaces designed to meet different teleprotection needs. Transmission in the digital or analog mode on different media is managed: Digital electrical medium (V11, G703) Versatile optical medium with SFP module Single-mode optical medium (1310 nm, 1550 nm) Multimode optical medium (850 nm) compliant with recommendation IEEE C37-94 Analog medium (single tone or dual tone coded version)
FIGURE 1 DIP ENVIRONMENT The DIP equipment also includes the following features: Possibility to transmit up to 8 independent commands in the digital mode and 4 commands in the analog mode Logical combination of inputs, type AND, OR, LOG (digital mode) for automation applications Indication of the status of alarms and teleprotection on the front face by LED, software Broad selection of communication interfaces Broad range of SFP optical modules Two contacts per command for input and output Dual tone coded analog mode
Two RS 232 access for connection to a PC or network access modem (1 local access et 1 remote access) Broad range of power supply boards for power supply voltages between 24 Vdc and 250 Vdc Acquisitions of commands by polarities between 24 and 250 Vdc in standard Possibility of power supply redundancy by adding a power supply board Possibility to supply the DIP by two different battery banks with identical or different voltages Modular design allowing hardware modification merely by changing boards Capacity to have an optical backup communication medium in the standby mode Permanent monitoring of the hardware and communication link Real-time measurement of the transfer time and BER (bit error rate) with indication when using the HMI software (digital mode only) Teleprotection fully programmable locally or remotely using the HMI software running on PC. This feature is available only in the digital mode. However, it is possible in all modes by using a management system (from version 2.x). Event and alarm recorder with a capacity of 1785 events each Time-stamping with a 1 ms accuracy for the event recorder Software upgrade by downloading from a PC Possibility to export the list of events, alarms and counter to spreadsheet compatible files (MS Excel type)
4.1
Protection schemes managed In all cases, the performance of a teleprotection link results from a compromise between transfer time, dependability and security. According to the protection scheme to which the equipment must be connected, one of the following three criteria must be chosen. To do this, the DIP digital teleprotection equipment has 3 types of application and 3 additional types in dual tone analog coded mode. Single tone analog mode: Permissive tripping (enhancing dependability) Blocking (enhancing transfer time) Direct tripping (enhancing security)
Dual tone coded analog mode: Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Reinforced blocking with more dependability Reinforced permissive tripping with more dependability Direct tripping reinforced with more security
The transfer times of reinforced protection schemes exceed those in single mode s. Digital mode: Permissive tripping (enhancing dependability) Blocking (enhancing transfer time) Direct tripping (enhancing security)
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 4.2 Optional features
The following features may be supplied on analog and digital DIP equipment: IRIG-B interface to synchronize event logging on both sides of the link. Addition of an I/O board module providing access to combination logic features on the inputs and outputs. Possibility of acquisition of commands in dry loop with the optional filter board FI005 to be fitted on the SR200 board only. FI002 filter board providing reinforced protection against capacitive discharge. Redundancy of opto-electrical interface boards (digital mode only). Optional ME50 board, ensuring: 4.3 Compatibility with an SNMP management system SNTP synchronization Access to reading the configuration using a standard browser
Allocation of logical input commands Each physical input of the DIP can be allocated to a logical operation. Several physical inputs can hence be grouped to form a command transmitted online. The combination authorized in the analog mode is: OR: OR logic between 2 inputs AND: AND logic between 2 inputs The combination authorized in the digital mode is: OR: OR logic between 2 inputs AND: AND logic between 2 inputs LOG: logical function as follows: I1 1 0 0 1 I2 0 1 0 1 O1 1 0 Previous status Previous status
TABLE 1 LOG FUNCTION Position <1> corresponds to a closed contact (polarized or not according to the option), <0> to an open contact. This feature is accessible when the number of inputs available exceeds the number of commands, as follows: Version with 2 commands with one I/O board Version with 4 commands with two I/O boards
Also, in these variants, the output command is activated on two independent relays.
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 4.4 Alarms
In case of malfunction, the equipment can generate a major alarm or a minor alarm. Major Alarm
The equipment is no longer able to ensure a good level of dependability and security, the following actions are taken: Protection of command outputs, the equipment is unavailable Lamps lighting Record usable for information (history) Availability of two alarm loops
Minor Alarm
The equipment is still able, in spite of the presence of a fault, to ensure a good level of dependability and security, the following actions are taken: Lamps lighting Record usable for information (history) Availability of two alarm loops
These alarms are detailed in the maintenance manual. 4.5 Auto-tests The DIP teleprotection equipment includes many automated procedures controlling permanently its different functions (monitoring components internal to the CPU, monitoring the power supply, monitoring I/O boards,.). The transmission link, whether digital or analog, is monitored permanently. The alarm conditions are met when the transmission medium is no longer able to ensure a good level of dependability and security. Any operating fault triggers the following actions: 4.6 Protection of command outputs Lamps lighting Record usable for information (history) Availability of alarm loops
Ease of use The DIP teleprotection equipment was designed to facilitate startup, operation and maintenance of the links. Hence, it is fitted with two access points allowing to connect a PC to ensure, without any other instrument, all startup and maintenance operations.
4.6.1
Customization Main features accessible in digital mode: Definition of identities and addresses of local and remote teleprotection Setting of the time and date of local and remote teleprotection Definition of the alarm trigger bit error rate Command prolongations in transmission and reception Types of configurable protection schemes Alarm customization
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP Main features accessible in analog mode: 4.6.2 Definition of identity and address of local teleprotection Setting of the time and date of local teleprotection Definition of a signal to noise ratio alarm. (analog dual tone only) Command prolongations in transmission and reception Configurable protection scheme type for each command Alarm customization
HMI monitoring features For all versions: Number of commands transmitted and received Alarm status Inhibition status Status of locks and loopbacks Current parameters display Dated lists of 1785 events and 1785 alarms
For the digital version: 4.6.3 Instant bit error rate Estimated transfer time
Features of tests and maintenance. For all versions: Operating commands Line locking Blocking of restitution relays Forcing of command transmission and restitution
For the digital version only: Remote loopback Measurement of transfer time in the events list Optic electric communication interface redundancy
For the analog single tone version only: Forcing of PLC commands
For the analog dual tone coded version only: Forcing of tone transmissions one by one and of the outputs Monitoring feature (option)
Monitoring by Web browser or SNMP based centralized system
When fitted, the optional board ME50 provides remote access to any DIP connected through an IP network. Limitation to 250 DIP per PC (number of virtual ports under MS Windows)
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 4.7 Accessories Electrical V11 to optical e-terragridcom OCM converter.
This converter, robust in the environment of electrical stations, provides a link between a digital mode and a remote transmission unit. Therefore, it avoids some disturbance met in copper cable links.
DIP in the
FIGURE 2 EXAMPLE OF LINK WITH E-TERRAGRIDCOM OCM
5.
5.1
DIGITAL MODE
Principle of digital transmission The transmission principle used is that of permanent transmission of a digital frame corresponding to the guard status. Closing one or several contacts changes this frame and transmits a command message. The length of the messages depends on the teleprotection variant chosen. The messages are coded in 4, 8 or 16 words selected in a code. The code is calculated as to provide optimum security and dependability. The transfer delay hence depends directly on the variant chosen.
5.2
Interfaces available in the digital mode The architecture and principles used ensure the DIP digital / analog teleprotection equipment can adapt to different transmission media: Speed between 32 Kbps and 2048 Kbps V11/ RS422 interface, rate from 32 Kbps to 256 Kbps G703-1 interface at 64 Kbps G703-6 interface (E1) at 2048 Kbps. Impedance 75 or 120 ohms Interface for single mode optical fiber , rate 256 Kbps Interface for multimode optical fiber, IEEE C37-94. Rate nX64 Kbps with n=1 to 8 Versatil Optical interface with interchangeable SFP module
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 5.2.1 Digital interfaces managed
ETCD
LINE (Clock)
ETCD
LINE Clock Clock
ETCD
Clock Clock LINE
OPTICAL FIBRE
Optical fibre
Clock Clock LINE
Optical fibre
Clock Clock
OPTICAL FIBRE
Optical fibre
Clock
ETCD
LINE
Optical fibre
D0045FRb
FIGURE 3 DIGITAL INTERFACES NOTE: The V11 / X24 configuration allows running with a clock supplied by the equipment (DCE mode). In each configuration, two DIP teleprotections can run together without the DCE equipment.
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 5.2.2 IR185 optical fiber interface
This interface, compliant with recommendation IEEE C37.94, was developed for short links, e.g. a direct secured connection to a multiplexer. Typically, the link in a station between the DIP located in a relaying building and the transmission equipment located in the communication building. The standardized connector is of the ST type, to be used with 62.5/125 m multimode fiber with an 850nm wavelength. The IEEE C37.94 protocol runs at 2 048 Kbits/s, twelve time slots (TS) of 64 Kbits/s each are available for a maximum transmission rate. In the DIP, this number is limited to 8. A rotary switch selects the number of slots used for communication. Please note that the IR-185 boards uses eight slots maximum. If N is the value on the coding wheel, the actual rate is Nx64kbps. 5.2.3 IR187 optical interfaces This optical interface was developed to be able to use SFP modules. It broadens the range of use of the DIP. Just change the module according to the application required. Installation modifications are hence highly simplified. The IR187 board can only be fitted in the latests AM170D rack. The IR187 interface can be configured to use two types of protocol: Manchester 2 protocol
In this case, the interface is compatible with the IR182 board it can replace. C37.94 protocol
This setting is recommended for optical links between several DIP. The IEEE C37.94 protocol runs at 2 048 Kbits/s, twelve time slots (TS) of 64 Kbits/s each are available for a maximum transmission rate. In the DIP, this number is limited to 8. A rotary switch selects the number of TS used for communication. Note: The IEEE C37.94 recommendation defines an optical interface standard between a teleprotection and a multiplexer. The IR187 interface can be set to use the C37.94 protocol, but unlike the IR185 board, it is not strictly compatible with this standard in terms of optical and connector characteristics.
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 5.2.4 SFP modules
The SFP module is a compact optical transceiver. It is fitted onto the IR187 board interchangeably to adapt to the needs of the application: These modules, defined originally for high speed STM-1 and faster SDH digital transmissions, perfectly match the requirements of DIP applications. Two main types of SFP modules may be used: Unidirectional
It is the most current standard for applications in the energy sector. One fiber is used by transmission direction (2 fibers for one link).
D0640xxb
FIGURE 4 UNIDIRECTIONAL MODULE There are several types of modules according to the range to be reached: Multimode module (1300 and 1500 nm) Single mode module (850 nm)
Bidirectional
A single fiber is used for both directions. Each communication direction uses a different wavelength.
D0641xxb
FIGURE 5 BIDIRECTIONAL MODULE
A new technology has emerged in the last few years covering two wavelengths carried by the fiber, in opposite directions. External WDM couplers (multiplexers), combining or separating the two wavelengths, are used at the ends. As the technology has evolved, passive external WDM couplers have been integrated to a standard optical transceiver interface. By combining the transmission and reception functions in a single fiber, without external mixer filter, the bidirectional SFP module on a single fiber is a simple way of offering optical transmission while halving fiber wiring required.
FIGURE 6 BIDIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION For short distances, the wavelength for one transmission direction is 1310nm and 1550nm in the other direction. For longer distances, the wavelength for one transmission direction is 1510nm and 1590nm in the other direction. For a given link, the modules are paired, one per end, each transmitting in the wavelength chosen. 5.2.5 Path redundancy. The DIP can toggle communication from the optical interface (IR187) to another digital interface (IR173, IR179 or IR180), according to the criteria defined by the user.
FIGURE 7 REDUNDANCY DIAGRAM
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 5.3 Optimizing the transmission medium
Digitizing the telecommunication networks for power distribution and carrying services optimizes exchanges of teleprotection messages, as they are transmitted as the other services of these systems. On the other hand, in the principle chosen, the link transmits a frame permanently, even if there are no commands, allowing both teleprotection to communicate and exchange this information via service words. The DIP can use an optical medium for the main path, and an electrical medium for the backup path. To avoid routing error, 2 DIP with different address cannot communicate. Similarly, over a link, one DIP shall be configured as master and the other as slave, avoiding untimely loopback. 5.4 Number of commands The architecture of the DIP digital teleprotection equipment allows to transmit 2, 4 or 8 commands using standard boards. Regardless of the variant used, the different commands are independent, but could also be transmitted simultaneously. 5.5 Applications Protection scheme customization is applied in group of 2 commands (1-2), (3-4), (5-6), (7-8). The application can be selected from the blocking, permissive or direct tripping. 5.6 Link control The transmission medium is controlled permanently using a part of the frame transmitted (call service channel). This service channel allows teleprotection to exchange data on their respective status, and decide whether the link is able to perform its task. The local unit reflects the status remotely using the remote alarm feature. The transmission delay of the link is also controlled permanently by the service channel, by measuring on both sides the return time of a particular message from the opposite side. The latter runs on any PC under Windows 2000 or XP, after connection to an appropriate connector on the DIP Teleprotection unit. The HMI application provides to the operator an instant measurement of the bit error rate over the communication link.
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 5.7 Maintenance and loopback
To control operation locally or remotely of the teleprotection unit, the operator can switch the unit into the maintenance mode and perform a local or remote loopback using the DIP human-machine interface: Local loopback can be used during transmission with a remote unit. Remote and local loopback are mutually exclusive. This means that if one is activated, the other is inaccessible. Commands can be forced with the HMI in local or remote mode.
Remote looping command
Tx
LOCAL LOOP REMOTE LOOP
Rx
Transmitter blocked or not
LOCAL
REMOTE
D0636 FRa
FIGURE 8 LOOPBACK This feature allows to check the entire transmission link.
6.
6.1
ANALOG MODE
Frequency coding of the single tone version In the analog DIP is idle. mode, a guard frequency is transmitted permanently when the
When one or several commands are present at the input of the transmission unit, the guard frequency is stopped, and one or several command frequencies are transmitted on line.
Idle
Guard frequency
Transmission of 2 commands
D0048 FRa
FIGURE 9 - TRANSMISSION SINGLE TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND The following table presents the frequency coding on line according to the status of the inputs: Input command Command 1 Command 2 Command 3 Command 4 Commands 1+2 Commands 1+3 Commands 1+4 Commands 2+3 Commands 2+4 Commands 3+4 Commands 1+2+3+4 Commands 1+2+3 Commands 2+3+4 Commands 1+3+4 Commands 1+2+4 Link test Guard Frequency coding Fc1 Fc2 Fc3 Fc4 Fc1+Fc2 Fc1+Fc3 Fc1+Fc4 Fc2+Fc3 Fc2+Fc4 Fc3+Fc4 Fc1+Fc2+ Fc3+Fc4 Fc1+Fc2+ Fc3 Fc2+ Fc3+Fc4 Fc1+ Fc3+Fc4 Fc1+ Fc2+Fc4 Fv + 6 dB Fv
TABLE 2 CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 6.2 Frequency coding of the dual tone version
In the single tone mode, the command frequency is Fv and each command corresponds to a frequency Fci (i = 1 to 4):
DF
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
D0485ENa
FIGURE 10 - TRANSMISSION DUAL TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND The following table presents the commands frequency coding: Input command Commands 1 Commands 2 Commands 3 Commands 4 Commands 1+2 Commands 1+3 Commands 1+4 Commands 2+3 Commands 2+4 Commands 3+4 Commands 1+2+3+4 Commands 1+2+3 Commands 2+3+4 Commands 1+3+4 Commands 1+2+4 Link test Guard Frequency coding F1+F3 F2+F4 F1+F4 F2+F5 F1+F5 F3+F5 F2+F6 F1+F6 F3+F6 F4+F6 F5+F7 F1+F7 F4+F7 F3+F7 F2+F7 F6+F7 F8
TABLE 3 CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 6.3 Description of the communication interface
Interface for 4-wire voice frequency transmission medium. For example, it may be a PLC, an analog channel on a multiplexer, a wired link, a leased line, a point to point radio link, etc.
FIGURE 11 VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE The voice frequency interface operates in a part of the audio frequency band at 4kHz, the signal is transported from the transmitter to the receiver via a telecommunication circuit. 6.4 6.4.1 Characteristics specific to the analog mode Transmission medium (all versions) The DIP teleprotection unit is designed to transmit low frequency signals over a 4-qire analog transmission medium with analog access to voice frequencies. The link is always bidirectional. The architecture and principles used ensure the DIP system can be adapted to the different bandwidth constraints of conventional transmission media: 6.4.2 300 - 2400 Hz (cables) 300 - 3400 Hz (microwave, multiplexers, radio, etc.) 300 - 2000 and 300 - 3700 Hz (PLC) Several 1600Hz bands in the dual tone version (see section 8.8.3 )
Optimizing the single tone version Using the DIP unit with PLC equipment (publication CEI 60495) allows to optimize the operation of the transmission medium: Optimizing the bandwidth
In the absence of commands, the link can transmit other signals (e.g. telephony or data). In this particular case, the Fv guard frequency can be the telephony signaling frequency of the telecommunication system, and hence can be generated by the latter. When a command is transmitted, the telephony transmission, calls and high frequency signals are interrupted to the benefit of the command frequency transmission. Optimizing power
On the other hand, a specific operating mode, called Advanced mode, allows to use all the power available of the PLC equipment to transmit teleprotection commands. In this scheme, the level of the command transmitted to the PLC equipment depends on the number of commands to be transmitted simultaneously, to obtain the P.E.P level, on the R.F medium, equivalent to the maximum power level of the PLC equipment. 6.4.3 Number of commands Single tone version The architecture of the DIP equipment is such that standard boards may be used to supply configurations with 2 or 4 commands. Two variants are available: Normal maintenance
In this mode, commands are totally independent and can be transmitted simultaneously. The output level is shared between the command signals. As transmission is simultaneous, the level of each command signal is limited so that the sum is equal or below the admissible transmitted level. Enhanced mode
This mode, defined by a particular coding mode by algorithm, forces the command output signal to the maximum output power available. This solution is particularly suited to the PLC medium and links sensitive when the optimized SNR is reached. The DIP transmits its command signal at the maximum output reference. In the case of two simultaneous commands, the level of each signal is reduced to avoid exceeding the maximum output reference. This configuration returns automatically to the initial setting (maximum reference) when canceling the simultaneous condition. With its 4 commands, the DIP unit is configured in a 2+2 operating mode. The 4 commands are distributed into 2 groups combined with a priority rule . Each group observes the maximum automatic reference concept. The 2+2 rule of priority is designed for optimized signal transmission. Rule of priority Active command input 1 2 1+2 3 4 3+4 1+3 1+4 2+3 2+4 1+2+3 2+3+4 1+2+3+4 Command transmitted 1 2 1+2 3 4 3+4 1 1 2 2 1+2 2 1+2 Group A has priority over group B Group B Comment Group A
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 6.4.4 Link test
The operator can check the global operation of the link during operation, by pressing a push button or through the maintenance PC. This procedure allows to transmit a test message with loopback at the other end of the link. This operation provides very fast checking of the transmission medium and the transmitter and receiver parts of the equipment. This procedure can also be launched, automatically, by the equipment with a programmable periodicity (daily or hourly). This feature is programmed via the HMI application and associated with an alarm level. In case of failure of the procedure (after three attempts), the equipment switches to the irreversible minor or major alarm condition according to the programming (fault lamps on and alarm loops activation). The alarm is maintained until operator intervention. In case of minor alarm, the next link test (periodical or manual) can be performed, and then the minor alarm is maintained or not, according to the result.
T CPU R
Test CPU Test
T R
FIGURE 12 LINK TEST ANALOG MODE 6.4.5 Unblocking feature This function allows to send one of the 4 commands upon a guard frequency reception fault. Triggering condition: a loss of the guard frequency or drop of its level above the programmed threshold and during a time longer than that selected, causes the transmission of a command calibrated on the output selected. 6.4.6 Transmission time: adjustable from 5 to 100 ms in 1 ms steps. Trigger threshold: adjustable from 10 to 20 dB under the nominal guard level by steps of 0.1 dB. Command time adjustable from 30 to 500 ms per 1 ms steps.
Voltage presence The voice frequency interface module provides an output (relay) contact closed as long as the DIP is powered on. This feature allows the communication equipment or protection automation system to be notified in case of loss of power supply of the teleprotection when the guard frequency is transmitted by the communication equipment. The circuit for this contact is located in the connector of the communication interface.
6.4.7
External alarm input The voice frequency interface board includes an opto-electronic input circuit activated by a voltage (48V nominal). This input can be configured by the HMI to trigger an alarm on the teleprotection equipment. This alarm, which can be minor or major, is activated after a user-set time (0 to 2.5 seconds per 100 ms steps). For example, this feature allows the DIP to consider the interruption or lack of the power supply, as well as the dedicated alarms transmitted by the communication equipment. The circuit for this input is located in the communication interface connector.
6.4.8
DIP connected to a PLC This paragraph concerns only the single tone enhanced analog mode.
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 6.4.8.1 Automatic maximum increase
When the DIP equipment is used in the enhanced mode with the PLC equipment, the command signal is set automatically to the maximum power available of the transmitter (the signals selected for the PLC are interrupted during the transmission of the command). The use of the power supply of the 40 W (+ 46 dBm) PLC for the command, or 80 W (+ 49 dBm), in an enhanced mode ensures the best command transmission in unfavorable conditions (optimized Signal to Noise Ratio). 6.4.8.2 Operation The 40 W optimized transmission power corresponds to the following data: Active command input One command (group A or group B) Two commands (in the same group) RF output signal per command +46 dBm +40 dBm PLC P.E.P. PLC P.E.P. -6 dB
The 80 W optimized transmission power corresponds to the following data: Active command input One command (group A or group B) Two commands (in the same group) RF output signal per command +49 dBm +43 dBm PLC P.E.P. PLC P.E.P. -6 dB
C1
Command input ON
C2
C3
P.E.P. limit R.F. output (CPL) C2 C1
C1
C2
C3
Automatic power process

D0487FRa
FIGURE 13 - EXAMPLE OF AUTOMATIC POWER PROCESS
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 6.5 Characteristics specific to the analog mode in the dual tone version Teleprotection mode: teleprotection CODED 8 frequency tones Dual tone command (F1 to F7) F8 for the guard frequency (use of PLC signaling forbidden) Dual tone link test Teleprotection with 4 commands (6 types of application) Bandwidths 9 x 1600 Hz between 300 Hz and 3600 Hz
The level and time of the noise alarm, part of the decision process and measured by smoothening the decision filters, must be defined. The delay of the blocking alarm, corresponding to a state of blocking of the decision algorithm (impossibility to recognize a command in bad line conditions), must be defined.
7.
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
A DIP Teleprotection unit is made of a rack, EUROPE type, 3 Units high, inside which the printed circuit boards supporting the components are placed (format 6 units, depth 220 mm) The modules are connected by a back plane also including outlets allowing to insert connectors to the power supply, transmission and operation media.
37.7 mm
57.1 mm
(3U) 132.5 mm
37.7 mm
300 mm or 316 mm
D0051XXb
FIGURE 14 DIP RACK
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP Different boards composing the DIP: Name
AM170 (1) AM170D UT148(1) UT148D SR114(1) SR114D SR115 SR116 SR200 AL137(2) AL142(2) AL139A(2) AL143(2) AL139B(2) AL140(2)
Function
Rack with FB182 back plane with single power supply connector Rack with FB182D back plane with two power supply connectors CPU board CPU board Input-output board with 4 commands for 48 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. Input-output board with 4 commands for 48 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 127 Vdc acquisition voltage. Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 127 Vdc acquisition voltage. Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. Enhanced restitution characteristics. Power supply 48 V nominal input with standard, normally closed, alarm contacts Power supply 48 V nominal input with normally open alarm contacts
Position
1 1 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 5/6* 5/6*
Power supply 110 V to 127 Vdc nominal input with standard, normally closed, alarm contacts 5 / 6 * Power supply 110 V to 127 Vdc nominal input with normally open alarm contacts Nominal input power supply 220 to 250 Vdc Nominal input power supply 24 Vdc 5/6* 5/6* 5/6*
Digital communication interface IR173_75 IR173_120 IR179 IR180 IR185 IR187(3) G703-6 interface (2 Mbps) Impedance 75 ohms G703-6 interface (2 Mbps) Impedance 120 ohms V11 interface (32 kbps to 512 kbps) G703-1 codirectional interface (64 kbps) Short distance optical fiber interface, C37.94 standard ( = 850 nm, 62.5/125 m), ST connectors. Rate Nx64kbps with N from 1 to 8. On CPU On CPU On CPU On CPU 4
Optical interface able to receive different types of SFP module. LC connector. Rate 256 kbps 4 or Nx64kbps with N 1 to 8 according to use
Analog communication interface IR183 Optional boards IR184 FI002 ME50 FI005 (4) IRIG-B interface board Filter against capacitive discharge RS232/IP converter, RJ45 LAN interface, SNMP management, configuration reading by web browser. Board allowing to acquire commands by dry loop instead of a voltage On CPU 2 On CPU board On SR200 Voice frequency interface. On CPU
TABLE 4 DIP BOARDS (1) Models reserved to France only. (2) To increase dependability, two power supply modules can be used, with the same input voltages or different voltages. (3) The IR187 board can only be fitted in the AM170D rack. (4) Only on SR200 board.
8.
8.1
MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
Mechanical characteristics Dimensions Height Width Depth Weight Cross-section of conductors on the connectors Diameter of the access connector cable Cable to connect to the terminal devices (command I/O) Protection rating 132 mm (3U) 483 mm (19") 300 mm (behind the bracket) 7.6 kg AWG 20 to 22 (0.324 to 0.519 mm) 8.2 mm maximum 0.08 < Cross-section < 2.5 mm IP30 TABLE 5 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 8.2 Environmental characteristics Climatic conditions Nominal operating range Temperature Relative humidity Operating limits Temperature Relative humidity Limit storage conditions Temperature Relative humidity Product safety Generic standard Teleprotection standard insultation resistance Dielectric tests at 50 Hz Impulse withsdtand level Earth continuity EMC requirements Compliance with IEC recommendations Teleprotection standard Generic immunity (industrial) Generic transmission (industrial) Generic immunity (station and substation environment) Electromagnetic compatibility requirements (tests) Static discharge Radiated magnetic field Fast transient bursts Surge immunity Conducted electromagnetic field Magnetic field Pulse magnetic field -40 C to +85C -40 C to +55C 95 % at 40 C -10 C to +55C 90 % at 23 C
100 % at 23 C no condensation EN 60255-5 (2000) / EN60255-27(2005) CEI 60834-1 (1999) / EN 60834-1 (2000) > 30.104 M / 500 VDC 2.5 kV on I/O commands 1 kV on the communication link 5 kV on I/O commands < 22 m
CEI 60834-1 (1999) / EN 60834-1 (2000) CEI 61000-6-2 (2005) CEI 61000-6-4 (2006) CEI/TS 61000-6-5 (2001)
CEI 61000-4-2(2001) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-2 (1996) CEI 61000-4-3 (2006) Level 3 CEI 61000-4-4 (2004) Level 4 / CEI 60255-22-4 (2002) Level B CEI 61000-4-5(2005) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-5 (2002) CEI 61000-4-6(2006) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-6 (2001) CEI 61000-4-8 (2001) Level 5 CEI 61000-4-9 (2001) Level 5
Voltage drops, short voltage interruptions and CEI 61000-4-29 (2000) variations Oscillatory waves Conducted disturbance common mode CEI 61000-4-12(2006) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-1 (2007) CEI 61000-4-16(2002) Level 4 / CEI 60255-22-7 (2003)
TABLE 6 ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 8.3 Electrical characteristics of the power supply 24 VDC 18 to 30 48 VDC 36 to 60 48/60 VDC 36 to 72
Nominal voltage Operating range (Vdc) Fuses Redundant power supply possibility Nominal consumption Maximum absorbed power Maximum current at power on
110/127 VDC 80 to 160
220/250 VDC 160 to 300
3.15 AT / 250 V 2 separate accesses 7.5 W < 15 W < 15 A (50s t 1.5 ms < 8 A (1.5 ms t 500 ms)
Frequency offset authorized between 100 Hz and 600 Hz
< 1.5 V peak to peak
Variations likely to be overlaid on 20 V max in amplitude top Maximum duration: 1 s Fleeting power cut Re-injected noise < 50 ms / 500 ms < 3 mV psophometric < 6 mV peak to peak TABLE 7 POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS 8.4 Characteristics of the IRIG-B interface B12x interface (modulated), 200-04 Standard, Input impedance 4.7 k at 1000 Hz, Modulation ratio: 3:1 to 6:1, Peak-to-peak input signal: 100 mV to 10 V.
IRIG-B format
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 8.5 Operating characteristics General Number of commands transmitted Particularity Command acquisition Physical input Mode Decoupling Input filter
2 or 4 with an I/O board, up to 8 with a second board All commands are independent and can also be used simultaneously
4 per I/O board, up to 8 with 2 boards Per voltage from 24 to 250 VDC In dry loop option with the SR200 board Opto-electronic 0 to 100 ms selectable by the HMI, 1 ms step Except for the single tone filter version from 0 to 3mS Value recommended 1mS Analog version only: from 1 ms to 5 ms (1 ms step) selectable by the HMI AND, OR, LOG possibility between 2 inputs
Validation times Input combination logic
Command holding time (default minimum or maximum time in calibrated mode) (2) For the digital transmission For the analog transmission Command restitution (according to type of SR board) Mode Number of contacts 0 or 20 to 200 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI 20 to 500 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI SR11x SR200
By contacts (static and electromechanical relay) 4 contacts in operation, up to 8 with two boards Contacts operating in pairs if the input combination logic is configured.
Maximum voltage Maximum current Cut-off power Short-circuit current Contact closing time
290 Vdc 2A 120 W 100 A / 30 ms Programmable
300 Vdc 5A 650 W (1)
Restitution holding time (minimum) (2) For the digital output For the dual tone analog output For the single tone analog output 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 1 ms step , either 200 ms to 3 s per 10 ms step with the HMI 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 2 ms step, either 200 ms to 3 s per 20 ms step with the HMI 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps
(1) Within the limit of maximum voltage or current. Examples: 5A under 127 Vdc or 2A under 300 Vdc (2) The holding times indicated are valid from version 2.2. For previous versions refer to Table 7
Auxiliary relays Mode Number of contacts By contacts (solid state relay) 1 contact in operation At least 2 auxiliary contacts per command (1 Tx and 1 Rx) Up to 4 auxiliary contacts per command (2 Tx and 2 Rx) with the input logic. Characteristics Alarm features Interface Number of contacts Lamps and relays 2 contacts for the minor alarm. 2 contacts for the major alarm Type of contacts Normally closed (by default). Normally open in option for 48/60Vdc and 110/127 Vdc Maximum voltage Maximum current Cut-off power Short-circuit current Delay on command relay alarm 290 VDC 5A 100 W 100 A / 30 ms 0 s / 2.5 s / 5 s / 10 s configurable by HMI identical to command restitution
Operator assistance Operations Maintenance Histories Alarm lamps and loops Connection of a PC for all startup and maintenance operations 1785 time-stamped events 1785 time-stamped alarms Resolution = 1 ms between 2 events or alarms TABLE 8 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
For versions before 2.2 Versions 1.x Command holding (default minimum time) Digital mode Dual tone analog mode Single tone analog mode Restitution holding (minimum time) Digital mode Dual tone analog mode 0 to 250 s in 1 ms steps 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 2 ms step either 200 ms to 3 s per 20 ms step with the HMI 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps NA 0 or 20 to 250 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps 0 to 500 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI NA Version 2.1
Single tone analog mode
TABLE 9 CHARACTERISTICS OF PREVIOUS VERSIONS
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 8.6 Characteristics of digital transmission Digital medium Transmission speed Connector Impedance Insulation G703.1 / G703.6 / V11 / Optical 32 Kbit/s to 2048 Kbit/s SUB-D 15 pin, shielded G703-6 120 or 75 By translator for G703 By optocouplers for V11 Optical characteristics IR187 board with SFP module
See following paragraph dedicated to SFP modules Multimode IR185 Compliance IEEC C.37.94 Transmission speed yes n x 64 kbps (1 n 8)
Optical power at 820 nm 50 m fibers Nominal -19 dBm Minimum -23 dBm Optical power at 820 nm 62 m fibers Nominal -16 dBm Minimum -19 dBm Receiver sensitivity - 30 dBm
TABLE 10 DIGITAL TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 8.7 8.7.1 Characteristics of SFP modules Single mode unidirectional modules S1.1 1261 to 1360 L1.2e 1480 to 1580 SM -14 to -8 -34 -8 -3 to +2 -34 -8 Double LC NA 30 NA 100
Type of interface Wavelength (nm) Type of fiber Average output power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Max acceptable power at receiver input Connector Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) Maximum theoretical distance * (km)
U1.2e 1480 to 1580
+5 to +8 -45 -10
4800 240
TABLE 11 CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES 8.7.2 Single mode bidirectional modules Pair 1 Type of interface Tx wavelength (nm) Rx wavelength (nm) Type of fiber Average output power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Max acceptable power at receiver input Connector Maximum possible chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) Maximum theoretical distance * (km) 80 -2 to -3 -34 -8 -2 to -3 -34 -8 -2 to -3 -34 -8 BIDI180-1 1310 1550 BIDI180-2 1550 1310 Pair 2 BIDI1120-1 1510 1590 BIDI1120-2 1590 1510 SM -2 to -3 -34 -8 LC NA 120 200 1 to 5 -45 -10 1 to 5 -45 -10 Pair 3 BIDI1200-1 1510 1590 BIDI1200-2 1590 1510
TABLE 12 CHARACTERISTICS OF BIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES 8.7.3 Multimode unidirectional module Type of interface Wavelength (nm) Type of fiber Average output power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Connector Maximum theoretical distance * (km) MM-20 830 to 860 MM -7 to -2 -16 LC 1
TABLE 13 CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL MM MODULES * This distance is given for information, depending on the quality of the facility. Only a measurement of the optical budget allows giving a precise evaluation.
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 8.8 8.8.1 Characteristics of voice frequency transmission General characteristics
Access medium Line impedance Return loss Galvanic insulation Connector Sender Precision of frequencies transmitted Transmission level Maximum global output level (4 commands) Pre-emphasis Signals non valid out of band Receiver Levels acceptable Adjustment -40 dBm to 0 dBm 1 for the guard frequency and 1 for commands 1 Hz -30 dBm to +6 dBm +6 dBm Up to 14 dB between two signals < 50 dB signals transmitted 600 or high impedance (selection by jumper) 20 dB minimum over 600 Translator SUB-D 15 pin, shielded
Acceptable difference between command and guard frequency 0 to 14 dB TABLE 14 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VOICE FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION 8.8.2 Band sharing - Single tone version The following table presents the allocation of frequencies in single tone bandwidths. 2 commands Channel bandwidth Guard frequency band (Rx) Guard frequency (Tx) Command 1 frequency Command 2 frequency 4 commands Channel bandwidth Guard frequency band (Rx) Guard frequency (Tx) Command 1 frequency Command 2 frequency Command 3 frequency Command 4 frequency 300 - 3400 Hz 3500 / 3800 Hz 3680 Hz 640 Hz 1280 Hz 1920 Hz 2560 Hz 300 - 2400 Hz 2400 / 2650 Hz 2600 Hz 400 Hz 800 Hz 1200 Hz 1600 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 2000 / 2300 Hz 2240 Hz 480 Hz 800 Hz 1120 Hz 1440 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 3600 / 3800 Hz 3680 Hz 480 Hz 800 Hz 1120 Hz 1440 Hz 300 - 3400 Hz 3500 / 3800 Hz 3600 Hz 900 Hz 2100 Hz 300 - 2400 Hz 2400 / 2650 Hz 2600 Hz 400 Hz 1200 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 2000 / 2300 Hz 2240 Hz 480 Hz 1120 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 3600 / 3800 Hz 3680 Hz 480 Hz 1120 Hz
TABLE 15 BAND SHARING SINGLE TONE VERSION
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 8.8.3 Band sharing Dual tone version
The following tables present the bandwidths and spectral distribution of frequencies used in the dual tone version. Band 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 F8 1741 1820 2110 2295 2479 2664 2848 3033 3429 Bandwidth 300-1900 400-2000 670-2260 850-2450 1040-2630 1220-2810 1400-3000 1590-3180 1990-3580
TABLE 16 DUAL TONE VERSION FREQUENCIES Frequencies (Hz) F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Link test Band 1 448 633 818 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 F3+F7 Band 2 527 712 897 1081 1266 1451 1635 1820 F3+F7 Band 3 818 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 F3+F7 Band 4 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 F3+F7 Band 5 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 2479 F3+F7 Band 6 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2295 2479 2664 F3+F7 Band 7 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 2479 2664 2848 F3+F7 Band 8 1741 1925 2110 2294 2479 2664 2848 3033 F3+F7 Band 9 2136 2321 2505 2690 2875 3059 3244 3429 F3+F7
TABLE 17 FREQUENCIES AND BANDWIDTH (DUAL TONE VERSION)
9.
9.1 9.1.1
PERFORMANCE
Digital interfaces Maximum transfer time according to transmission speed Operation mode Blocking G703 64 kbps Permissive Direct tripping Blocking V11 256 kbps Permissive Direct tripping G703.6 2048 kbps Blocking Permissive Direct tripping Blocking Permissive Direct tripping 4 Commands 5.5 ms 6.5 ms 8.0 ms 3.0 ms 3.5 ms 4.0 ms 3.0 ms 3.0 ms 3.0 ms 3.0 ms 3.5 ms 4.0 ms 8 Commands 7.5 ms 9.5 ms 12.0 ms 3.5 ms 4.0 ms 5.0 ms 3.5 ms 3.5 ms 3.5 ms 3.5 ms 4.0 ms 5.0 ms
Junction type
Optical link IR182/IR187
TABLE 18 MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIMES FOR ELECTRICAL AND IR187 BOARDS NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter 1ms activated and latest I/O board SR200 9.1.2 Transfer time according to the IEEE C37-94 protocol C37.94 interface Rotary switch position 8 Permissive Blocking Direct T0 Max. (ms) 3,5 3,0 3,5
TABLE 19 MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIME FOR THE IR185 & IR187 BOARD WITH MUX NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter 1ms activated and latest I/O board SR200 9.1.3 Security The following table indicates the values of dependability and security according to the protection mode with 4 commands and a speed of 64 kbps. Protection mode Security (Puc) TEB = 0.5 (worst case) Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping < 2E-7 6E-14 1E-20
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 9.1.4 Dependability Protection mode Dependability (Pmc) TEB = 1E-3 Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping 9.2 9.2.1 Analog interface Single tone version Transmission time 1E-30 1E-35 1E-19
For each application, the two times indicated are expressed in milliseconds, and with 6 dB boost without 6 dB boost respectively (in normal mode).
BANDWIDTH
Command channel Guard frequency
OPERATION Blocking
2 cmds 4 cmds
Permissive tripping
2 cmds 4 cmds
Direct tripping
2 cmds 4 cmds
300-3400 300-2400 300-2000 300-2000
3600 Hz 2540 Hz 2240 Hz 3680 Hz
7-7 10 - 10 10 - 10 10 - 10
7-8 11 - 12 11 - 12 11 - 12
8-9 13 - 13 13 - 13 13 - 13
9 - 10 13 - 14 14 - 15 14 - 15
11 - 12 18 - 18 18 - 18 18 - 18
14 - 15 19 - 20 19 - 20 19 - 20
TABLE 20 TRANSMISSION TIME SINGLE TONE VERSION NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter deactivated. 9.2.2 Security (bandwidth 300-3 400 Hz) The values indicated in the following table correspond to the worst SNR. Protection mode Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping 9.2.3 2 commands
-4
4 commands
-4
<6.10
-6
<3.10
-6
<6.10
-11
<6.10
-11
<1.10
<6.10
Dependability (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz) The values indicated in the following table correspond to a 6 dB S/N ratio. Protection mode Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping 2 commands
-4
4 commands
-4
<4.10
-4
<6.10
-4
<7.10
-4
<8.10
-4
<8.10
<8.10
General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP 9.3 9.3.1 Analog interface Dual tone version Transmission time BANDWIDTH Blocking 300-1900 Hz STANDARD OPERATION Permissive tripping 10 ms
Direct tripping
BANDWIDTH Blocking 300-1900 Hz 11 ms
REINFORCED OPERATION Permissive tripping 12 ms Direct tripping 13 ms
TABLE 21 TRANSMISSION TIME DUAL TONE VERSION 9.3.2 Security (bandwidth 300- 1900 Hz) Security (for the worst SNR) Blocking <1.10 9.3.3
-5
Permissive tripping <1.10

-5
Direct tripping <1.10-9
Dependability (bandwidth 300 - 1900 Hz) Dependability (for S/N = 6 dB) Blocking Permissive tripping See curves below Direct tripping
Installation e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN IN/A23
INSTALLATION
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 1/38
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SHIPPING
2.1 Packaging 2.2 Storage 2.3 Parts list
7 8
8 8 8
3. 4.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS INSTALLATION

4.1 Description 4.2 Implementation of the boards
10 11
11 11 11 12 13
4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3
Basic configuration Adding additional boards to the rack Optional boards
5.
POWER SUPPLY BOARDS

5.1 Range of Vdc values of power supply boards 5.2 Constraints relative to the Vdc input values 5.3 Power supply and consumption
14
14 14 14
6.
CONNECTION
6.1 Rear connectors 6.2 I /O wiring of terminal blocks
15
15 16 16 17 18 20 20 20 21 22 22 23 24 24 24 24 25
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4
Description of connection to the terminal blocks I/O pin-out of terminal blocks Allocation of logical input commands Examples of wiring 6.3 Wiring alarms and copy contacts
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5
Description of connection to the terminal blocks Pin-out of the copy and alarm outputs on the terminal blocks Particular case of the AL142 and AL143 boards. Allocation of copy outputs Recommendation 6.4 Power supply wiring
6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3
Description of connection to the terminal blocks Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170 rack Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170D rack 6.5 Access port for line connection support
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 2/38 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 Description of the connectors Pin-out of the V11 / X24 - IR179 interface Pinout of the G703-1 (64 kbps) - IR180 codirectional interface Pinout of the G703-6 (2 Mbps) - IR173 interface Voice frequency (analog mode) - IR183 interface 6.6 Optical fiber access port 6.7 Standard HMI access port (PC connection) 6.8 Optional RJ45 HMI access port 6.9 IRIG-B interface port 6.10 FI002 wiring
Installation e-terragridcom DIP 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 31 31 32
7. 8.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE APPENDIX

8.1 AM170 - Location of the terminal blocks 8.2 AM170D - Location of the terminal blocks Double power supply version 8.3 Connector kits delivered with the equipment 8.4 Connection of the 2-command version 8.5 Connections of the 4-command version with 1 I/O board 8.6 Connections of the 4-command version with 2 I/O boards 8.7 Connection of the 8-command version
33 34
34 35 36 37 37 38 38
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 DIP RACK FIGURE 2 EXAMPLE OF PLUG-IN CARD POSITIONS FIGURE 3 LOCATION OF CHILD BOARDS ON THE CPU BOARD FIGURE 4 - AM170 CONNECTORS AT THE BACK FIGURE 5 - AM170DCONNECTORS AT THE BACK FIGURE 6 10 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR FIGURE 7 PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK TOOL FIGURE 8 11 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR FIGURE 9 - AM170D WIRING OF TWO POWER SUPPLIES FOR A SINGLE SOURCE FIGURE 10 PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE FIGURE 11 PINOUT OF THE G703.1 INTERFACE FIGURE 12 PINOUT OF THE G703.6 2 MBIT/S IR173 INTERFACE FIGURE 13 PINOUT OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE FIGURE 14 PINOUT OF THE ANALOG INTERFACE FIGURE 15 DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE FRONT FIGURE 16 DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR AT THE BACK FIGURE 17 RJ45 PORT FIGURE 18 - AM170 - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK FIGURE 19 - AM170D - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK FIGURE 20 AM170 KIT FIGURE 21 AM170D KIT FIGURE 22 CONNECTIONS OF THE TWO-COMMAND VERSION FIGURE 23 CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 1 I/O BOARD FIGURE 24 CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 2 I/O BOARDS FIGURE 25 CONNECTIONS OF THE 8-COMMAND VERSION 11 12 13 15 15 17 17 20 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 31 34 35 36 36 37 37 38 38
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 LIST OF PARTS IN THE UNIT TABLE 2 BOARDS AVAILABLE TABLE 4 LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS ON THE P10, P11, P12 AND P13 TERMINAL BLOCKS TABLE 6 LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS OF TERMINAL BLOCKS P14, P15 AND P16 TABLE 7 PINOUT OF ALARM TERMINAL BLOCKS P16 TABLE 9 PINOUT OF THE P17 TERMINAL BLOCK TABLE 10 PINOUT OF THE MAIN & AUXILIARY TERMINAL BLOCK TABLE 11 PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE TABLE 12 CONNECTION OF THE G703-1 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE TABLE 13 CONNECTION OF THE G703-6 IR 173 INTERFACE TABLE 14 CONNECTION OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE TABLE 15 CONNECTION OF THE VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE TABLE 16 COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS TABLE 17 OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE TABLE 18 COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS TABLE 19 OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE 8 9 18 21 22 24 24 26 27 28 29 29 34 34 35 35
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION A B C D11 E111 F11 A22 A23 DATE 19/10/2000 18/04/2001 04/10/2001 02/06/2004 14/11/2007 11/02/2008 15/09/2009 01/06/2010 COMMENTS Original issue Added the optical interface Added the grounding recommendation ALSTOM Added the analog part New structure. New writing Minor corrections Software version 2.2 Minor corrections, added SR200 I/O interface, IR187 optical interface
NOTE:
As of revision C, the document numbering has changed in compliance with ALSTOM standards, however the document index was incremented to allow better monitoring.
BLANK PAGE
1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1) SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRALOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45 SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRALOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1)
(1)
2.
2.1
SHIPPING
Packaging The packaging of the DIP includes: The DIP. A set of connectors, including small size tools (x 5) to insert the wiring. The reports on tests performed in the factory.
The DIP digital teleprotection equipment is made of a frame designed to host plug-in boards. This frame is designed to be located inside a standard 19-inch cabinet with fastening by the front face. The equipment is packaged and grouped in a standard box suited for transport. Each box is marked on the outside with the serial number of the equipment to avoid opening when shipping several units in a same delivery. The total weight of the equipment is about: 8 kg. 2.2 Storage If the equipment is not installed within the weeks after shipped from the factory, it should be removed from its packaging before being stored, preferably in a shop. The equipment should be installed and powered on when intended to be stored for long periods (several months). The temperature limits for transport and storage are -40 C to +85 C. 2.3 Parts list The following table indicates the different components, or options, of a unit according to the variant chosen: EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS Variant 2 or 4 commands (3) 3U rack AM170 (4) or AM170D CPU board UT 148 (4) or UT148D Terminal blocks Line connection (female connector 15 pins) CP connection (female connector DB 9 pins or RJ45 at the front (option) Power supply board ALxxx (1) I/O board SRxxx (1) Digital communication interface IRxxx (1) Optical communication interface IR182, IR185 or IR187 Voice frequency interface IR183 Filter board FI002 1 or 2 (3) 1 1 9 (5) 1 1 1 or 2 (2) 2 1 (DIP digital version) 1 (DIP optical fiber version) 1 (DIP analog version) 1 for the 2 or 4 command variant only (option) TABLE 1 LIST OF PARTS IN THE UNIT (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Refer to the list of boards available in table 2 below. 2 boards if redundant power supply. Depends on the contact diagram selected. Models reserved to RTE (France) 8 only with the AM170 frame Variant 8 commands
Category and name of the board Power supply boards
Function
Comment
AL137 / AL142 (1) Power supply 48 / 60 Vdc AL139A / AL143 (1) AL139B AL140 I/O boards SR114 / SR114D SR115 SR116 SR200 Nominal I/O 48 to 250 Vdc Nominal I/O 24 to 60 Vdc Nominal I/O 48 to 127 Vdc Nominal I/O 24 to 250 Vdc Dry loop I/O on option Communication interface IR173_75 IR173_120 IR179 IR180 IR182-1310 IR182-1550 IR185 IR187 IR183 Optional features ME50 G703-6 (E1) 75 ohms G703-6 (E1) 120 ohms V11 / X24 RS422 G703-1 co-directional Single mode optical fiber (1310 nm) Single Mode optical fiber (1550 nm) Multimode optical fiber (850 nm) Versatile optical fiber with SFP module Voice frequency interface Power supply 110 / 127 Vdc Power supply 220 / 250 Vdc Power supply 24 Vdc
Input 36 to 72 Vdc Input 80 to 160 Vdc Input 160 to 300 Vdc Input 18 to 30 Vdc
Command input 30 to 300 Vdc Command input 18 to 72 Vdc Command input 36 to 152 Vdc Command input 18 to 300 Vdc With FI005 board
Digital mode (256 kbps) Digital mode (256 kbps) Digital mode (32 kbps to 256 kbps) Digital mode (64 kbps) Optical fiber mode Optical fiber mode Optical fiber mode C37.94 All optical modes Analog mode
RS232/IP converter, RJ45 LAN interface, Child board of the UT148D SNMP management, configuration reading by web browser. IRIG-B synchronization interface IRIG-B 12x format Standard 200-04 Input impedance 4.7 k at 1000 Hz Modulation ratio 3:1 to 6:1 Peak to peak amplitude input signal: 100 mV to 10 V 2 or 4 commands only
IR184
FI002 FI005
Filter against capacitive discharge
Child board allowing to acquire commands With SR200 board only by dry loop instead of a voltage TABLE 2 BOARDS AVAILABLE (1) Alarm loop relays are fitted on the power supply boards. In standard these contacts are normally closed, in option these contacts are normally open on the AL142 and AL143 boards.
3.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating limit temperatures: Maximum relative humidity at 23 C: -40 C to +70 C 90 %
These units are designed to be installed in premises protected from the rain.
4.
4.1
INSTALLATION
Description The rack dimensions comply with the EUROPE type 19-inch standard, 3 units high as per the DIN 41494 standard. The latter is designed to be installed in bays or boxes. The only support and fastening points are located on the front face of the racks, on drilled angle pieces.
4.2
Implementation of the boards With its modular design, the DIP is available on several versions: analog, digital, 2, 4 or 8 commands, etc. Optional boards are also managed. The different configurations of the equipment are created by adding optional boards onto the basic configuration.
37.7 mm
57.1 mm
(3U) 132.5 mm
37.7 mm
300 mm or 316 mm
RS232C connector
Optional optical interface
Flap
1 or 2 AI13x power supply boards according to the option chosen
D0052FRc
FIGURE 1 DIP RACK The UT 148, I/O boards type SRxxx and FI002, 220 mm long and 6U wide, are plugged and locked horizontally on the left-hand part of the rack. (positions 1 to 3). Power supply boards of the ALxxx type and optical interfaces IR182, IR185 or IR187 are plugged and locked vertically in the right-hand part of the rack (positions 4 to 6). 4.2.1 Basic configuration It is made of: 1 UT148 or UT148D CPU board in position 1. 1 I/O board (1) in position 3. 1 power supply board (1) in position 5.
(1)
See table 2 List of boards available.
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 12/38 The following figure shows examples of board positions in the rack:
SRxxx board
ALx xx IR185
UT 148 board
Version with 4 commands, or 2 commands with combination logic Optical interface
SRxxx board IR183 interface UT 148 board SRxxx board

ALxxx ALxx x
SRxxx board
Version with 4 commands, analog with combination logic
IR183 interface UT 148 board SRxxx board
ALx xx
FI002 board
Analog version with 4 commands, or 2 commands with combination logic with filtering interface and redundant power supply
UT 148 board
ALx xx
SRxxx board
Version with 8 commands, or 4 commands with combination logic Optical interface
IR182
D0494FRb
FIGURE 2 EXAMPLE OF PLUG-IN CARD POSITIONS 4.2.2 Adding additional boards to the rack According to the configuration required, the following boards may be added: 1 second I/O board (SRxx) in position 2 in the 4-command version to extend the number of outputs or supply the combination logic on inputs. 1 communication interface board selected among: Digital interface (V11, G703-1 or G703-6) installed as child board on the CPU board. (see figure 3) Optical fiber interface board (IR182, IR185 or IR187) installed in position 4 Analog interface IR183 installed as child board on the CPU board
IR xxx Communication interface board
IR184 Optional IRIG-B interface board
ME50
D0053 frb
FIGURE 3 LOCATION OF CHILD BOARDS ON THE CPU BOARD 4.2.3 Optional boards The following boards may be added as an option: 1 redundant power supply board in position 4. 1 IRIG_B interface (IR184) installed as child board on the CPU board. 1 LAN, ME50 interface as child board on the CPU board. 1 I/O board in position 2 in the 4-command version to extend the number of outputs or supply the combination logic on inputs. 1 filtering board FI002 in position 2. In this case, the equipment is limited to 4 or 2 with input logic. 1 impedance adaptation board FI003 fitted on the SR200 board. 1 board allowing acquisition of commands in dry loop FI005 fitted on the SR200 board.
5.
POWER SUPPLY BOARDS

FOR POWERING ON, ACTIVATE THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD USING THE SWITCH ON THE FRONT FACE OF THE ALxxx (FOR THE LOCATION, REFER TO THE APPENDIX OF THE COMMISSIONING MANUAL).
5.1
Range of Vdc values of power supply boards The DIP digital teleprotection equipment is supplied in direct current by 1 or 2 independent power supply boards. The power supply boards are available in several versions covering a broad range of nominal input voltages. The following table specifies the nominal voltage as well as the power supply range matching each power supply board: BOARD Nominal voltage Vdc AL137 / AL142 AL139A / AL143 AL139B AL140 48 60 110 127 220 250 24 Min voltage Vdc 36 80 160 18 Max voltage Vdc 72 160 300 30
TABLE 3 RANGE OF VDC VALUES OF POWER SUPPLY BOARDS The power supply modules are protected by 3.15 AT / 250 V fuses. THE INPUT VOLTAGE OF THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD MUST COMPLY WITH THE RANGE OF VALUES MANAGED.
5.2
Constraints relative to the Vdc input values The Vdc input signal applied must comply with the following rules: Alternate frequency component above or equal to 100 Hz: 0.12 Un peak to peak. Input voltage variation: 20 V max in amplitude 10 ms max for the duration 100 V/ms max slope
5.3
Power supply and consumption The DIP digital Teleprotection unit must be supplied by a power supply board compatible with the Vdc input values complying with the constraints described above. It may be referenced to the mechanical ground of the rack or not. Actuate the switch present on the power supply board to power on the teleprotection. In case of redundant power supply, two different sources may be used, with a different voltage level (e.g. 48 Vdc and 125 Vdc or any other combination). Consumption of a unit fully equipped at nominal voltage is below 20W. Idle consumption (without command) is 7 W.
6.
CONNECTION
To meet safety requirements as well as the EMC specifications announced, the protection conductor terminal (ground) at the back of the DIP unit must be connected to a grounding bar, through the shortest possible path. A flat braid in tinned copper with a cross-section of 12mm x 1mm and a length of 30cm is supplied to this effect with the equipment. This braid must be connected to one of the two M5 studs located at the back of the DIP unit. SAFETY OF THE EQUIPMENT DEPENDS ON ITS CONNECTION TO THE PROTECTION CONDUCTOR (GROUND). THE LEVEL OF EMC PROTECTION IS RELATED DIRECTLY TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE GROUNDING CONNECTION. ANY DIFFERENCE MAY HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON THE PROTECTION. When the DIP commands electromechanical relays, these should be fitted with free wheel diodes at the coil terminals.
6.1
Rear connectors There are two types of racks differentiated by their back panel: the first AM170, reserved to RTE (France) features a single power supply connector, the second AM170D with two power supply connectors.
Both types of racks allow to install redundant power supply boards. The connectors and external connecting points of the DIP teleprotection equipment are located on the rear panel of the equipment.
Optical fibre access
D0058FRa
FIGURE 4 - AM170 CONNECTORS AT THE BACK
P14 P16
1
P11
1 1
Tx Rx
P15
1
P10 P12 P19 P20

1
AUX
- BAT +BAT - BAT +BAT
MAIN
P13
1
P18
D0492Frc
FIGURE 5 - AM170DCONNECTORS AT THE BACK
Certain connectors are integral with the motherboard and are detailed as follows: Terminal block P10 reserved to acquisition inputs 1 to 4. Terminal block P11 reserved to restitution contacts 1 to 4. Terminal block P12 reserved to acquisition inputs 5 to 8, or 1 to 4 when the FI002 optional board is installed. Terminal block P13 reserved to restitution contacts 5 to 8. Terminal block P14 for transmission copy auxiliary outputs and command restitutions 1 to 4. Terminal block P15 for transmission copy auxiliary outputs and command restitutions 5 to 8. Terminal block P16 for distribution of major and minor alarm loops. Terminal block P17 for power supply in the case of the AM170. Terminal block for main P17 MAIN & auxiliary P21 AUX power supply in the case of the AM170. Female connector 15 pins P18 for access to the communication line Female connector 9 pins P19 for the RS 232C link with the maintenance / operation interface PC or remote access. BNC P20 connector to connect an external clock by IRIG-B signal.
The following connectors are part of the optical interface and are accessible by the back (hole in the rack) FC/PC connectors on the IR182 board. ST connectors on the IR185 board (IEEE C37-94), and LC or double LC connectors on the IR187 board (SFP module). FIGURE 5 SHOWS THE POSITION OF THE TX AND RX OPTICAL CONNECTORS FOR THE IR182 AND IR185 BOARDS ON THE AM170D RACK. THE TX AND RX ARE REVERSED ON THE SFP MODULES OF THE IR187 BOARD 6.2 I /O wiring of terminal blocks Commands transmitted and received through the protection relays are wired to the P10, P11, P12 and P13 terminals blocks. All input and output connections of these terminal blocks are isolated. 6.2.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks The terminal blocks are fitted with a locating device to prevent any misconnection. The I/O wires, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm, are connected to these terminal blocks through 10 self-locking connecting devices.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D0055XXa
FIGURE 6 10 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR The wiring of these terminal blocks must be performed as follows: Strip each wire to a length of 9 mm, Using the tool supplied (lever)) (see Figure 7 Plug-in terminal block tool), press on 1, Insert the wire in the dedicated housing, Release the lever.
This type of terminal block offers the benefit of providing constant pressure to hold the cables while avoiding any risk of damage upon installation (over tightening)
Lever
D0054 FRa
FIGURE 7 PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK TOOL 6.2.2 I/O pin-out of terminal blocks The following table indicates the I/O pin-out on the P10, P11, P12 and P13 terminal blocks. In this table, the following symbols are used to mark the pins: IN A command is activated by applying voltage to these terminals. + designates the point to be connected to the positive terminal of the application designates the point to be connected to the negative terminal of the application T and C respectively designate the MAKE and COMMON points of the available contacts.
OUT
ACCESS POINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 O O O O O O O O O O + + + +
P10 TERMINAL BLOCK External loop Terminal present IN1 C T IN2 C T IN3 C T IN4 C T
P11 TERMINAL BLOCK External loop Terminal present OUT1 + OUT2 + OUT3 + OUT4 +
P12 TERMINAL BLOCK External loop Terminal present IN5 C T IN6 C T IN7 C T IN8 C T
P13 TERMINAL BLOCK External loop Terminal present OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
TABLE 4 LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS ON THE P10, P11, P12 AND P13 TERMINAL BLOCKS The pins 1 and 2 of the P10, P11, P12 and P13 connectors (see figure 6 10 pin wago connector) must be connected together. This bridging allows checking the presence of the terminal block. If removed, the connection is no longer detected, and an alarm generated.
RECOMMENDATION ALL EXTERNAL RELAYS CONNECTED TO THE OUTPUT CONTACTS OF THE TELEPROTECTION MUST BE FITTED WITH A FREEWHEELING DIODE.
6.2.3
Allocation of logical input commands Depending on the DIP hardware configuration, a combinatorial logic operator can be applied to inputs and then allocated to commands sent to another DIP. Input logic allows a logical operator to be affected to board input and to be allocated to a command. Permitted combinations are: OR: OR logic between 2 inputs AND: AND logic between 2 inputs LOG: logical function (digital mode) as follows This feature is accessible when the number of inputs available exceeds the number of commands, as follows: Version with 2 commands with one I/O board Version with 4 commands with two I/O boards
Also, in these variants, the command output is activated on two independent relays. The allocation of input and output commands is given by table 5 below) using the human machine interface (see the HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE chapter Configuring I/O parameters).
TERMINAL COMMAND ALLOCATION VERSION 2 COMMANDS 1 VERSION 4 COMMANDS 1 VERSION 4 COMMANDS 2 VERSION 8 COMMANDS(1) BLOCK I/O BOARD I/O BOARD I/O BOARDS 2 I/O BOARDS DIGITAL
ONLY
Acquisition COMMAND 1
IN1 IN2 IN1 or IN2 IN1 and IN2 LOG (IN1, IN2) (2)
IN1
IN1
IN3 IN4 IN3 or IN4 IN3 and IN4
IN2
IN2
P10
LOG (IN3, IN4) (2) Acquisition COMMAND 3 IN3
IN3
IN4
IN4
Acquisition COMMAND 5 Acquisition P12 COMMAND 6 Acquisition COMMAND 7 Acquisition COMMAND 8 Restitution COMMAND 1 Restitution COMMAND 2 Restitution COMMAND 3 Restitution COMMAND 4 Restitution COMMAND 5 Restitution COMMAND 6 Restitution COMMAND 7 Restitution COMMAND 8 OUT1 / OUT2 OUT3 / OUT4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT1 / OUT2 OUT3 / OUT4 OUT5 / OUT6 OUT7 / OUT8
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8
P11
P13
TABLE 5 COMMAND ALLOCATION

(1)
Standard I/O, without combination Only in digital mode
(2)
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 20/38 6.2.4 Examples of wiring
For wiring Examples in different contexts (2, 4, 8 commands, one or two I/O boards) see figure 17 rj45 portFigure 18 - AM170 - CONNECtors at the backFigure 19 - AM170D CONNECTOR AT THE BACK and figure 20 AM170 kit.
6.3
Wiring alarms and copy contacts The command output copies are wired on terminal blocks P14, P15 and the alarm contacts output on terminal block P16 at the rear side of the unit. The connector reference and Pin 1 position are labelled on the rear panel (see Appendix -figure 17 rj45 port).
The copy outputs are distributed into 4 groups, all isolated from one another. Each group is composed of 4 normally-open contacts and one common contact. The alarm outputs are distributed as 4 normally-closed contacts all isolated from each other, 2 contacts for major alarms and 2 contacts for minor alarms. 6.3.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks The conductors, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm, are connected to these terminal blocks through 11 self-locking connecting devices.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
D0056XXa
FIGURE 8 11 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR
Installation e-terragridcom DIP 6.3.2 Pin-out of the copy and alarm outputs on the terminal blocks
The following table specifies the PIN-OUT of the command copy outputs and alarm contact outputs on the P14, P5 and P16 terminal blocks. For the alarm terminal block, refer also to the following chapter when using an AL142 or AL143 board. The following abbreviations were used to name the pins: COPY Ti COPY C R , T, C for the i contact of copy output normally-open. for the auxiliary output common contact designates the normally-closed, normally-open and common contacts available, respectively. TERMINAL BLOCK P14 T T T T C COPY T1 COPY T2 COPY T3 COPY T4 COPY C 1 to 4 not used T T T T C COPY T5 COPY T6 COPY T7 COPY T8 COPY C 5 to 8 T T T T C TERMINAL BLOCK P15 T T T T C COPY T9 COPY T10 COPY T11 COPY T12 COPY C 9 to 12 not used COPY T13 COPY T14 COPY T15 COPY T16 COPY C 13 to 16 C Major alarm output 2 11** R C Major alarm output 1 8 9 10 R not used C Minor alarm output 2 5* 6 7 R not used TERMINAL BLOCK P16 C Minor alarm output 1 2 3 4 R not used
PIN 1
TABLE 6 LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS OF TERMINAL BLOCKS P14, P15 AND P16 * Pin 5 is common to contacts 1 to 4 of terminal blocks 14 & 15.
** Pin 11 is common to contacts 7 to 10 of terminal blocks 14 & 15.
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 22/38 6.3.3 Particular case of the AL142 and AL143 boards.
When these optional boards are used, the alarm contacts are normally open. The output points on P16 are identical but the allocation is changed. PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 C T C T C T TERMINAL BLOCK P16 C T Minor alarm output 1 not used Minor alarm output 2 not used Major alarm output 1 not used Major alarm output 2
TABLE 7 PINOUT OF ALARM TERMINAL BLOCKS P16 6.3.4 Allocation of copy outputs Copy output relays are used to transmit information on the current status of transmission and reception, as follows: Tx State for command number n: the contact(s) is(are) closed while the command n is being transmitted, open when in guard state or while other commands are transmitted. Rx state for command number n: the contact(s) is(are) closed while the command n is being received, open when in guard state or while other commands are being received.
The allocation of the copy output relays depends on the configuration (see table below).
COMMAND ALLOCATION COMMAND 1 Acquisition COPY COPYT5 COPYT5 COMMAND 2 Acquisition COPY 2 COMMANDS VERSION 1 I/O BOARD P14 P14 COPYT1 P14 COPYT1 P14 COP YT1 COP YT2 COPYT1 4 COMMANDS VERSION 1 I/O BOARD 4 COMMANDS VERSION 2 I/O BOARDS COMMAND 1 Acquisition COPY COPYT5 VERSION 8 COMMANDS) 2 I/O BOARDS (DIGITAL ONLY) P14 P14 COP YT5 COM MAN D2 Acqui sition COP Y COPYT2 COP YT2 P15 COMMAND 3 Acquisition COPY COPYT3 COPYT9 COPYT1 P14 COPYT1
COPYT6
COPYT6
COPYT2
COPYT13 COMMAND 4 Acquisition COPY COPYT14 COMMAND 5 Acquisition COPY COMMAND 6 Acquisition COPY COPYT4 COP YT4
COPYT3 COP YT10 COMMAND 4 Acquisition COPY COPYT14 P15 COPYT9 COPYT10
COM MAN D5 Acqui sition COP Y COM MAN D6 Acqui sition COP Y
COPYT4
COMMAND 7 Acquisition COPY COP YT3
COPYT11
COMMAND 8 Acquisition COPY
COPYT12
COMMAND 1 Output COPY
P14
COPYT3
COPYT7
P14
COPYT5
P14
TABLE 8 ALLOCATION OF COPY OUTPUT 6.3.5 Recommendation All relays connected to the output contacts must be fitted with a free-wheeling diode.
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 24/38 6.4 Power supply wiring
According to the type of rack, there are one or 2 power supply terminal blocks. In the case of a rack with 2 power supply terminal blocks, these are marked main for the main power supply and aux for the auxiliary power supply respectively, on the rear face (see Appendix figure 20 AM170 kit). The functional ground is mostly useful to protect the user during the laboratory test. In normal use, the grounding braid supplied with the equipment must be connected to one of the two M5 studs located at the back of the DIP unit. According to the installations, it may be better to connect the +BAT or -BAT to this functional ground, or leave these polarities floating. 6.4.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks The cables, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm, are connected to the terminal block through a WAGO self-locking connector. 6.4.2 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170 rack PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MARKING -BAT -BAT +BAT +BAT POLARITY Power supply negative polarity
Power supply positive polarity Non connected Functional ground
TABLE 9 PINOUT OF THE P17 TERMINAL BLOCK 6.4.3 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170D rack Two power supply connectors are available on the rear panel (see figure 5). P21 main connector, P17 secondary connector in case of redundant power supply. These two connectors offer the same pinout: PIN 1 2 3 4 MARKING -BAT +BAT POLARITY Power supply negative polarity Power supply positive polarity Non connected Functional ground
TABLE 10 PINOUT OF THE MAIN & AUXILIARY TERMINAL BLOCK These two connectors are independent, and can hence be supplied by two different sources. Note: When a single source is available but two power supply boards are to be installed, the two connectors must be linked, as shown in the following figure.
AUX
- BAT +BAT - BAT +BAT
MAIN
Battery
P17
P21
D0065 FRa
FIGURE 9 - AM170D WIRING OF TWO POWER SUPPLIES FOR A SINGLE SOURCE 6.5 Access port for line connection support This chapter concerns all versions of the DIP equipment, except the variant using optical fiber. In this case, refer to chapter 6.6 on connections by optical fiber. 6.5.1 Description of the connectors The line connection interface (connector P18) is on the mother board of the equipment (See Appendix - Figure 18 - AM170 - CONNECtors at the back The connection must be implemented using the male SUB-D 15 pin connector supplied with the equipment, It is locked by screws (supplied). A cover holding the cable for a straight outlet is also part of standard equipment. Non-allocated terminals must not be connected, in compliance with isolation restrictions. The definition of the multi-strand conductor to be used is the following: To be welded: AWG 20 to 22 (0.324 to 0.519 mm). Acceptable cable diameter: 8.2 mm maximum. Cable-clamp reducers for maximum diameters of 4.1mm, 5.5mm and 6.8mm are supplied. Cable shielding must be connected to the metallic cover. For digital teleprotection links, immunity to electromagnetic disturbance is linked directly to proper connection of the cable shield to the functional ground on both sides of the link.
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 26/38 6.5.2 Pin-out of the V11 / X24 - IR179 interface
V11/X24 interface (ISO 1903)
S: clock transmitter circuit for non-standard use
D0607 FRa
FIGURE 10 PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Name direction Signal designation nc T(A) output nc R(A) input nc S(A) S'(A) input output nc Signal synchronization (A) DCE mode Synchronization (A) Reception (A) Transmission (A)
Pin
Name Signal designation
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
T(B)
Transmission (B)
R(B)
Reception (B)
S(B) S'(B)
Signal synchronization (B) DCE mode synchronization (B)
TABLE 11 PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE The S signal is a non standard feature. In fact, the DIP must be considered as being a DTE. The S synchronization clock signal is supplied in order to provide a direct link between two DIP units to perform tests. The use of the S signal is controlled by the HMI.
Installation e-terragridcom DIP 6.5.3 Pinout of the G703-1 (64 kbps) - IR180 codirectional interface
Codirectional interface G703.1
D0608 FRa
FIGURE 11 PINOUT OF THE G703.1 INTERFACE
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Name direction Signal designation nc T(A) output nc R(A) input nc nc nc nc Reception (A) Transmission (A)
Pin
Nam Signal designation e
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
T(B) Transmission (B)
R(B) Reception (B)
TABLE 12 CONNECTION OF THE G703-1 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 28/38 6.5.4 Pinout of the G703-6 (2 Mbps) - IR173 interface
The IR173, G703-6, 120 ohm interface board has been derived into 2 models: IR173_120 (Index B), 2 Mbps / 120 ohms interface IR173_75 (Index A), 2 Mbps / 75 ohms interface
D0609Frb
FIGURE 12 PINOUT OF THE G703.6 2 MBIT/S IR173 INTERFACE
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Name direction Signal designation nc nc Tx + output nc Rx + input nc nc nc Reception (A) Transmission (A)
Pin
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Rx Reception (B) Tx Transmission (B)
TABLE 13 CONNECTION OF THE G703-6 IR 173 INTERFACE
FIGURE 13 PINOUT OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Name direction Signal designation nc Tx + nc output nc input nc nc nc Transmission (A)
Pin
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Tx -
Transmission (B)
Rx +
Reception (A)
Rx -
Reception (B)
TABLE 14 CONNECTION OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE 6.5.5 Voice frequency (analog mode) - IR183 interface
Analog interface
D0610FRa
FIGURE 14 PINOUT OF THE ANALOG INTERFACE Pin Name directionPin Name Designation and description of the circuits 1 2 Tx(A) 4 Rx(A) 6 EA(+) 7 AL(A) 8 output input input output nc 9 Tx(B) 11 Rx(B) 13 EA(-) 14 AL(B) 15 Voice frequency output signal (transmission) Voice frequency signal in (receive) External Alarm input (opto-isolated) Live output circuit (solid-state relay) 3 TBB(A) output 5 RB(A) output 10 TBB(B) Tx Blocking / Boost command circuit (solid-state relay) 12 RB(B) Rx Blocking command circuit (solid-state relay)
TABLE 15 CONNECTION OF THE VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 30/38 6.6 Optical fiber access port
In case of configuration by optical fiber, the optical interface board, installed in the reserved location of the rack, must be blocked with its two fastening screws. Three versions of optical boards are managed: IR182, IR185 and IR187. The connectors of the optical interface, accessible at the back (see figure 20 AM170 kit), are part of the optical board: 2 FC / PC connectors for IR182. ST connectors for IR185. LC connector for IR187.
The types of fibers recommended are: Single mode fiber 9/125 m for 1310 and 1550 nm applications Multimode fiber 62.5/125 m for 850 nm applications. EMC protection When not used, the rack connector must be covered with an EMC protection plate.
REMOVING THE OPTICAL BOARD DO NOT REMOVE THE OPTICAL BOARDS WITHOUT HAVING REMOVED THE TWO SCREWS FASTENING THE REAR PANEL.
6.7
Standard HMI access port (PC connection)
The DIP is equipped with two RS 232 serial ports, one located on the front panel, the second on the back of the unit (see Appendix-Figure 16 Description of the HMI CONNECtor at the back). The download / display port fitted on the front panel is an ultra low voltage circuit (ULV) ensuring basic isolation against electric shock. When powering on the relay, the terminals of this port must not be touched to prevent any risk of electric shock in case of fault. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software, it must not be connected permanently. The connectors are female SUB-D 9-pin connectors. These ports allow to connect the PC to the unit by means of an RS 232C cable. When two cables are connected, the one on the front face has the priority.
FIGURE 15 DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE FRONT When using the RS 232C main connector at the back, an adapter of the DTE-DCE type must be connected. This port supports the RTS / CTS hardware protocol and the remote connection.
D0619FRa
FIGURE 16 DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR AT THE BACK CAP When not used, fit the cap supplied onto the connectors. 6.8 Optional RJ45 HMI access port If the ME50 option is chosen, the RS232 front serial port is replaced by a standard RJ45 network port.
D0620FRa
FIGURE 17 RJ45 PORT
6.9
IRIG-B interface port If an optional IRIG_B interface board is installed, this port is used to connect with an external clock supporting an IRIG-B synchronization interface (IRIG-B mode with 1 kHz analog modulation). The connector, located on the units rear, is a standard female BNC connector (see P20 in Appendix - Figure 19 - AM170D CONNECTOR AT THE BACK). It is accessible with a male connector of a standard BNC coaxial cable.
Cap When not used, the connector must be covered with the BNC cap supplied with the equipment.
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 32/38 6.10 FI002 wiring
An FI002 board may be installed to guarantee advanced protection against capacitive discharge at the input. The command input must be connected to the P13 connector. The P10 and P12 connectors must be interconnected (see the figure au-dessoushere below).
1 P11
Command Outputs access
10
P10
P12
FI002 filter wiring
P13
+
Cmd 1
+
Cmd 2
Cmd 3
Command inputs
Cmd 4
D0489ENa
FIGURE 26 WIRING OF THE COMMAND AND FILTER INPUTS
7.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The equipments installation includes the following phases: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Install casing (rack, cabinet, or box). Insert cables for subsystems and operation (power supply, earthing, transmission medium, and protection equipment). Mount rack in casing. Fasten in place using the screws on the front panel. Connect rack to earth circuit. Before installing the cards in the racks, make sure apparatus is switched off (plugs removed or switch open). Install cards in rack. NOTE: The optical interface card must be mounted and tied to the rack before mounting the rack in the frame.
8.
8.1
APPENDIX
AM170 - Location of the terminal blocks
D 0058 FRa
FIGURE 18 - AM170 - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK Command input and output terminal blocks P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 Acquisition of commands 1 to 4 Restitution of commands 1 to 4 Acquisition of commands 5 to 8 Restitution of commands 5 to 8 Command copy contacts 1 to 4 Command copy contacts 5 to 8 TABLE 16 COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS Connecting terminal blocks to the protection and command management systems ( 6.2 and 6.3)
Auxiliary terminal blocks P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 Terminal blocks for connection to alarm management systems ( 6.3) Power supply connection terminal blocks ( 6.4) Line connection port ( 6.5) Remote access ( 6.7) External time synchronization connection port ( 6.8) TABLE 17 OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE
Installation e-terragridcom DIP 8.2
AM170D - Location of the terminal blocks Double power supply version
P14 P16
1
P11
1 1
Tx Rx
P15
1
P10 P12 P20 P19

1 1
AUX
- BAT + BAT
MAIN
- BAT + BAT
P13 P18
D0492 Frc
FIGURE 19 - AM170D CONNECTOR AT THE BACK The figure above shows the position of the Tx and Rx optical connectors for the IR182 and IR185 boards. These outputs are reversed on SFP modules of the IR187 board. Command input and output terminal blocks P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 Acquisition of commands 1 to 4 Restitution of commands 1 to 4 Acquisition of commands 5 to 8 Restitution of commands 5 to 8 Connecting terminal blocks to the protection and command management systems ( 6.2 Auxiliary outputs of commands 1 to and 6.3) 4 Auxiliary outputs of commands 5 to 8 TABLE 18 COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS
Auxiliary terminal blocks P16 MAIN AUX P18 P19 P20 Terminal blocks for connection to alarm management systems ( 6.3) Main power supply connection terminal blocks ( 6.4) Secondary power supply connection terminal blocks Line connection ports ( 6.5) Remote access ( 6.7) External time synchronization connection port ( 6.8) TABLE 19 OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 36/38 8.3 Connector kits delivered with the equipment
FIGURE 20 AM170 KIT
FIGURE 21 AM170D KIT The SUB-D 15 pin connector can change according to the supplier.
Installation e-terragridcom DIP 8.4 Connection of the 2-command version
Copy Command acquisition 1 Copy Command acquisition 2 Copy Command restitution 1 Command restitution 1 Command restitution 2 Copy Command restitution 2 S S S S
Group 1 Common copy group 1 Common copy group 2
Group 2
EN
EN
EN
EN
Command acquisition 1 Command acquisition 2

D 0059 FRa
FIGURE 22 CONNECTIONS OF THE TWO-COMMAND VERSION 8.5 Connections of the 4-command version with 1 I/O board
Copie Acquisition Ordre 1 Copie Acquisition Ordre 2 Copie Acquisition Ordre 3 Copie Acquisition Ordre 4 Copie Restitution Ordre 1 Copie Restitution Ordre 2 Copie Restitution Ordre 3 Copie Restitution Ordre 4
Restitution Ordre 1 S1
P14
Commun Copies Acquisition d'ordres Commun Copies Restitution d'ordres
P11
P10
E1
E2
E3
E4
{
Acquisition Ordre 3
Acquisition Ordre 1
Acquisition Ordre 2
Acquisition Ordre 4
D0060FRa
FIGURE 23 CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 1 I/O BOARD
DIP/EN IN/A23 Page 38/38 8.6 Connections of the 4-command version with 2 I/O boards
Copy Command acquisition 1 Copy Command acquisition 2 Copy Command restitution 1 Command restitution 1 Copy Command restitution 2 S1 S2 S3 S4 Command restitution 2
Group 1 Common group 1 Common group 2 Common group 3 Common group 4 Group 3
Group 2
Command acquisition 1 Command acquisition 2 EN1 EN2 EN3 EN4
Group 4
Copy Command restitution 4 Copy Command restitution 3 Copy Command acquisition 4 Copy Command acquisition 3
EN5
EN6
EN7
EN8
Command acquisition 3 Command acquisition 4
S5
S6
S7
S8
Command restitution 3
Command restitution 4
D 0061 FRa
FIGURE 24 CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 2 I/O BOARDS 8.7 Connection of the 8-command version
Copy Command acquisition 1 Copy Command acquisition 2 Copy Command acquisition 3 Copy Command acquisition 4 Copy Command restitution 1 Copy Command restitution 2 Copy Command restitution 3 Copy Command restitution 4
Command Command Command Command restitution 1 restitution 2 restitution 3 restitution 4 S1 S2 S3 S4
Group 1 Common group 1 Common group 2 Common group 4 Common group 3 Group 3
Group 2
Command Command Command Command acquisition 1 acquisition 2 acquisition 3 acquisition 4 EN1 EN2 EN3 EN4
Group 4
Copy Command restitution 8 Copy Command restitution 7 Copy Command restitution 6 Copy Command restitution 5 Copy Command acquisition 8 Copy Command acquisition 7 Copy Command acquisition 6 Copy Command acquisition 5
EN5 EN6 EN7 EN8 Command Command Command Command acquisition 5 acquisition 6 acquisition 7 acquisition 8
S5 S6 S7 S8 Command Command Command Command restitution 5 restitution 6 restitution 7 restitution 8

D0062 FRa
FIGURE 25 CONNECTIONS OF THE 8-COMMAND VERSION
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN CM/B23
COMMISSIONING
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 1/44
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2.
2.1.1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOREWORD

2.1 Step by step procedure Reminder on the final status of the installation procedure
7 8
8 8
3. 4.
PRIOR CONDITIONS CHECK HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

4.1 4.2 Initial status Configuration of the I/O board jumpers
9 10
10 10 10 10 12 12 13 13 14 14
4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3
I/O board type SR11x I/O board type SR200 Option FI005 on SR200 board 4.3 Configuration of the IR187 optical communication interface
4.3.1 4.3.2
IR182 mode C37.94 Mode 4.4 4.5 Configuration of the IR185 optical communication interface Final status
5.
POWER ON
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Initial status of the power on Prior conditions Power on procedure Final status of the power on
15
15 15 15 15
6.
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Introduction Prior conditions Initial status Configuration of the DIP digital version
16
16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 19 20 21 22 22
6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.4.8 6.4.9 6.4.10
Creating a user password Creating a software password Configuring General Parameters Configuring the communication interface Configuring the redundancy interface Configuring Input/output Parameters Configuring application parameters Configuring alarm parameters Entering comments Saving the configuration
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 2/44 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7 Configuring DIP Single tone analog version
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 23 23 23 24 25 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 29 30 31 31 31
Creating a user password Configuring General Parameters Configuring Sender Parameters Configuring Receiver Parameters Configuring I/O parameters Alarms parameters Single tone Saving the configuration 6.6 Configuring DIP Analogue Dual Tone
6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5 6.6.6 6.6.7
Creating a password Configuring general parameters - Dual tone analog version Configuring sender parameters - Dual tone version Configuring receiver parameters - Dual tone version Configuring I/O parameters - Dual tone version Configuring alarms parameters - Dual tone version Saving the configuration 6.7 Final status of the configuration step
7.
TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION

7.1 7.2 7.3 Initial status Checking procedure Final status
32
32 32 33
8.
OPERATING CHECKS
8.1 8.2 8.3 Initial status Procedure Self-checks
34
34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3
Alarms forcing Maintenance forcing commands Forcing PLC commands 8.4 8.5 Online checks Final status
9.
APPENDIX A
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 Implantation diagram of the UT148 / UT148D board Implantation diagram of the SR11x board and jumper settings Implantation diagram of the SR200 board and jumper settings Implantation diagram of the AL137 and AL140 board Implantation diagram of the AL139 board Implantation diagram of the IR183 board Implantation diagram of the FI002 board and jumper settings Implantation diagram of the IR185 board and jumper settings Implantation diagram of the IR187 board and jumper settings
36
36 37 38 40 40 41 42 43 44
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE FIGURE 2 JUMPERS OF THE SR11X BOARDS FIGURE 3 JUMPERS OF THE SR200 FIGURE 4 IR187 MODE IR182 FIGURE 5 IR187 MODE C37.94 FIGURE 6 POWER ON PROCEDURE FIGURE 7 FINAL CHECKS AND CONFIGURATION 8 10 11 13 13 15 34
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR11X BOARDS TABLE 2 ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR11X TABLE 3 CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR200 BOARDS TABLE 4 ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR200 TABLE 5 PARTICULAR CASE SR200 WITH FI005 TABLE 6 SETTINGS OF THE ROTATING SWITCH TABLE 7 GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION TABLE 8 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET TABLE 9 REDUNDANCY INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET TABLE 10 I/O PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION TABLE 11 APPLICATION PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION TABLE 12 ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION TABLE 13 COMMENTS PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION TABLE 14 GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION TABLE 15 SENDER PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION TABLE 16 RECEIVER PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION TABLE 17 I/O PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION TABLE 18 ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION TABLE 19 GENERAL PARAMETERS DUAL TONE TABLE 20 SENDER PARAMETERS DUAL TONE TABLE 21 RECEIVER PARAMETERS DUAL TONE ANALOG 10 10 11 11 12 14 17 17 18 19 21 22 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
TABLE 22 I/O PARAMETERS SHEET DUAL TONE TABLE 23 ALARMS PARAMETERS DUAL TONE
30 31
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION A B C D E A22 A23 B23 DATE 28/12/2000 23/04/2001 23/08/2004 14/11/2007 29/02/2008 20/04/2009 13/01/2011 28/03/2011 COMMENTS Original issue Added the optical interface ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version New features, task oriented writing Minor correction Version 2.2 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 interface, IR187 optical interface Former State on digital version added
BLANK PAGE
1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(1)
(1)
2.
FOREWORD
Commissioning the DIP applies the step by step procedure described in the following paragraphs. Applying this procedure prevents any risk of malfunction or damage of the equipment. This procedure also guarantees an optimum configuration of the link and better levels of performance in a minimum time, in compliance with safety rules. The commissioning procedures and checks require from the user an acquaintance with the use of the HMI software (refer to the chapter Human-Machine Interface for more information). Only a PC supporting the HMI software can be used for commissioning, no other measurement device or multimeter is required.
2.1 2.1.1
Step by step procedure Reminder on the final status of the installation procedure The first step in the commissioning procedure is the final status of the installation procedure: The DIP unit is grounded with the grounding braid supplied with the equipment. The boards are installed. The power supply cables and those of the transmission medium are connected.
Steps in commissioning a DIP unit:
Start
Prior conditions check
Hardware configuration
Power on
Software configuration
Tests and troubleshooting
Operating checks
End
D0611FRa
FIGURE 1 COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE
3.
PRIOR CONDITIONS CHECK

Before commissioning, the following points MUST be checked: Installation complete. The DIP unit is grounded (refer to Connection in the Installation chapter). The value of the direct power supply on the level of the DIP input. Connection with the power supply terminal block (refer to Wiring the supply in the Installation chapter). Power supply board compliant with the direct input voltage available (refer to Ranges of Vdc values of the power supply boards in the Installation chapter). If applicable, polarity of the command inputs at connectors P10 and P12. Pins 1 and 2 on the terminal blocks P10, P11, P12 and P13 must be connected with a jumper (refer to I/O wiring of the terminal blocks in the Installation chapter), otherwise an alarm is present. Pre-requisite: only a trained and authorized technician may perform the installation, programming, commissioning, maintenance, test and repair operations. Caution:
Signs: precautions and indications on hazardous voltages and power levels must be observed.
4.
4.1
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
Initial status Prior conditions have been checked. The positions of the links must not be modified, unless the input voltage has been isolated.
4.2
Configuration of the I/O board jumpers This step requires an intervention on the boards. Safety reminder:
ESD protection: the modules of this equipment contain devices likely to be damaged by static discharge. Appropriate measures are to be applied before unpacking the modules or removing them from the equipment racks. Essential precautions avoiding damage due to static discharge during any intervention on the modules: grounding braids for technical staff and supply of antistatic workshops. The modules can be shipped only in their original packing or be installed in the equipment racks. 4.2.1 I/O board type SR11x SR11x boards are fitted with the S2 S3 S4 S5 jumpers.
S5
S4
S3
S2
D0127XXa
FIGURE 2 JUMPERS OF THE SR11X BOARDS The jumpers on the SR11x I/O boards must be configured according to the value of the command acquisition voltage. The following table indicates the correspondence between command inputs and the location of the SR 11x board in the rack in an installation with two boards. S2 SR11x In high position SR11x In medium position Input 1 Input 5 S3 Input 2 Input 6 S4 Input 3 Input 7 S5 Input 4 Input 8
TABLE 1 CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR11X BOARDS The following table indicates, per type of SR11x board, the value of direct voltage accepted at command input according to the position of each jumper. SR114 SR114D SR115 48 V -60 Vdc 24 Vdc SR116 110 V -127 Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc
Position 1-2 2-3
220 V 250 Vdc 220 V 250 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc
TABLE 2 ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR11X 4.2.2 I/O board type SR200 The SR200 board is fitted with several configurable jumpers.
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 4.2.2.1 Acquisition of a command
The JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 jumpers must be configured according to the value of the command acquisition voltage.
FIGURE 3 JUMPERS OF THE SR200 The following table indicates the correspondence between command inputs and the location of the SR 200 I/O board in the rack in an installation with two boards. JP1 SR200 In high position in the rack SR200 In medium position in the rack Input 1 JP3 Input 2 JP5 Input 3 JP7 Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
TABLE 3 CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR200 BOARDS The following table indicates the value of direct voltage accepted at command input according to the position of each jumper. SR200 24Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc 110-127Vdc 220-250 Vdc Minimum 18 Vdc 36 Vdc 83 Vdc 165 Vdc Maximum 30 Vdc 75 Vdc 158 Vdc 312 Vdc
Position 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8
TABLE 4 ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR200
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 12/44 4.2.2.2 Output contacts
All output contacts both for commands and command copy are implemented by a static relay and a mechanical relay in parallel. The JP9 to JP32 jumpers allow to commission the static relay or not, to the detriment of transfer time. Position 1 2 JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12 JP13 JP14 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP18 JP19 JP20 JP21 JP22 JP23 JP24 JP25 JP26 JP27 JP28 JP29 JP30 JP31 JP32 4.2.3 Option FI005 on SR200 board When the SR200 board is fitted with the FI005 module to send commands by dry loop instead of voltage, the JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 jumpers must be set to position 1-2. Position 1-2 SR200 24Vdc Minimum 18 Vdc Maximum 30 Vdc Command copy output on mechanical relay and static relay in parallel Command copy output on mechanical relay only The allocation of the copy outputs is detailed in the INSTALLATION part Command output on mechanical relay and static relay in parallel Command output on mechanical relay only Position 2 3 Command 1 or 5 2 or 6 3 or 7 4 or 8
TABLE 5 PARTICULAR CASE SR200 WITH FI005 4.3 Configuration of the IR187 optical communication interface The IR187 board can be configured in two different modes: IR182 mode using the Manchester 2 protocol, IR185 mode using the protocol defined by the IEEE C37.94 recommendation.
Check that the SFP module is present and matches the application required.
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 4.3.1 IR182 mode
This mode ensures compatibility with the IR182 single mode optical interface. Set JP1 to 1-2 Set JP2 to 2-3 Set the coding wheel to position 1
7 8
FIGURE 4 IR187 MODE IR182 4.3.2 C37.94 Mode This mode is recommended for intra-substation optical links. Set JP1 to 2-3 Set JP2 to 1-2 The coding wheel must be set to position 1 to 8, according to the flow chosen. If N is the value on the coding wheel, the actual rate is Nx64kbps. See table 6 which is also applicable here.
3 2
7 8
FIGURE 5 IR187 MODE C37.94
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 14/44 4.4 Configuration of the IR185 optical communication interface Safety reminder
Laser / LED: beware when using optical boards of class I Laser / LED products. The IR185 optical communication interface has a rotating switch to be defined according to the frequency clocks of the DIP. The following table allows selecting the position of the rotating switch. Position of the rotating switch 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Actual rate DIP Factory test 64 Kbps 128 Kbps 192 Kbps 256 Kbps 320 Kbps 384 Kbps 448 Kbps 512 Kbps Not used
TABLE 6 SETTINGS OF THE ROTATING SWITCH 4.5 Final status The hardware configuration of the I/O boards is compatible with the CC value of the input signal command. If applicable, the optical communication interface is configured and ready for use. The DIP is ready to be powered on.
5.
5.1
POWER ON
Initial status of the power on Prior conditions have been checked. The hardware configuration is complete.
5.2
Prior conditions This procedure requires knowing the location of the switch on the power supply boards and indication of the LED status. For more information on the location of the LEDs and the switch on the boards, refer to appendix A. For more information on the indication of the status of the LEDs, refer to Maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
5.3
Power on procedure Powering on the DIP unit is performed as follows:
Start
Power on (AL13x / AL14x boards)
Check the state of the LEDs: Is the AL13x / AL14x power supply LED green ?
No
Yes
Check the state of the LEDs: Are the state indicators on the UT148 board green ?
No
Yes
Repair (See Tests and troubleshooting)
End
D0612FRa
FIGURE 6 POWER ON PROCEDURE When the DIP is powered on, check the status of the LEDs, which must be green. 5.4 In the case of a LED corresponding to a fault, refer to Tests and fault isolation in the Maintenance chapter.
Final status of the power on At the end of this procedure, the DIP is powered on and ready to receive the configuration files.
6.
6.1
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Introduction The software configurations of the digital DIP, single tone analog DIP and dual tone analog versions are described separately in the following paragraphs.
6.2
Prior conditions The software configuration requires a PC running the HMI software, compatible with the firmware of the DIP. The operator must be acquainted with the use of the HMI software. To create a new configuration, you must be connected with a DIP. Upon commissioning, you must: Either create a new configuration, Or have a configuration already saved in the PC, Or log onto the DIP, read the configuration, modify it, and return it to the DIP if required.
6.3
Initial status The DIP unit is powered on.

ATTENTION
OPERATING THE HMI DIP: DURING OPERATION MAY DISTURB THE TELEPROTECTION LINK BY THE USE OF CERTAIN FEATURES PROPOSED BY THE DIP HMI WITHIN EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE (E.G. COMMAND FORCING).
6.4
Configuration of the DIP digital version For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP DIGITAL, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter. Each step of the procedure corresponds to a paragraph in the HMI chapter. The configuration procedure is as follows: Creating a user password Creating a software password Configuring General Parameters Configuring the backup interface (option) Configuring I/O parameters Configuring application parameters Configuring alarm parameters Entering comments Saving the configuration
6.4.1
Creating a user password Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password. First, create the passwords, then the associated levels. To create a user password, refer to DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP DIGITAL. The password is saved in the PC.
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 6.4.2 Creating a software password
For more security, a software password may be created, which is then saved in the equipment. To create a software password, refer to DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP DIGITAL. If the software password is lost, the CPU, UT148 board must be returned to the factory to be reset. 6.4.3 Configuring General Parameters Refer to the Configuring the general parameters in the Human Machine Interface - DIP Digital chapter for more details (description of the parameters and range of values). Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: The greyed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters. Parameter / HMI General configuration Parameter value Com link Logical address Number of commands Master . 2 commands 8 commands HMI port speed 19200 bit / s 2400 bit / s 600 bit / s IRIG-B Limitation of the number of events and alarms Enabled Yes (255) Disabled No (1785) 4800 bit / s 1200 bit / s Slave 0 to 127 4 commands
TABLE 7 GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION * To set the synchronization refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-F-013. 6.4.4 Configuring the communication interface Parameter / HMI Communication interface Type Clock (*) Speed (kbps)
IR173 G703.6 IR179 V11 / X24
Received Internal (default) Normal (default) H1 H2 Received Internal (default) Received Internal (default)
2048
32 128 64 256
64 256
IR180 G703-1 codirectional IR182 Optical fiber or IR187 mode IR182
IR185 IEEE C37.94 Received or IR187 mode C37.94 Internal (default)
Adjustable by coding wheel
TABLE 8 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET * To set the clocks refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-009. 6.4.5 Configuring the redundancy interface If the redundancy interface is installed, its parameters must be configured.
Refer to the Configuring the redundancy interface in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter / HMI Redundancy interface Redundancy interface Type Clock (*) Speed (kbps)
IR173 G703.6 IR179 V11 / X24
Received Internal (default) Normal (default) H1 H2 Received Internal (default) 5 to 100 mS
2048
32 128 64
64 256
IR180 G703-1 codirectional Delay before switching
TABLE 9 REDUNDANCY INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET * To set the clocks refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-009.
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 6.4.6 Configuring Input/output Parameters
Refer to the Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter / HMI I/O configuration Input/Output Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 1 Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 2 Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 3 Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 4 Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 5 Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 6 Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 7 Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 8 Reverse logic command** Parameter value (*) 1 board 2 boards
........................
1 to 100 ms
........................
1 to 100 ms
........................
1 to 100 ms
........................
1 to 100 ms
........................
1 to 100 ms
........................
1 to 100 ms
........................
1 to 100 ms
........................ 1 2 3 4 5
1 to 100 ms 6 7 8
Input Filter and logic/Reverse E1 Logic Command 1 E1 and E2 Input Filter and logic/Reverse E3 Logic Command 2 E3 and E4 Input Filter and logic/Reverse E5 Logic Command 3 E5 and E6 Input Filter and logic/Reverse E7 Logic Command 4 E7 and E8
E2
E1 or E2
LOG (E1 and E2) E4 E3 or E4
LOG (E7 and E8)
TABLE 10 I/O PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION * * For more details on delay parameters, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-008.
** When a command is programmed in reverse logic, if the acquisition input is idle, teleprotection sends a permanent command.
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 20/44 6.4.7 Configuring application parameters
Refer to the Configuring the application parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter / HMI Configuring application parameters Holding delay / Transmission 1 Holding delay / Transmission 2 Holding delay / Transmission 3 Holding delay / Transmission 4 Holding delay / Transmission 5 Holding delay / Transmission 6 Holding delay / Transmission 7 Holding delay / Transmission 8 Relay state on alarm / command 1 Relay state on alarm / command 2 Relay state on alarm / command 3 Relay state on alarm / command 4 Relay state on alarm / command 5 Relay state on alarm / command 6 Relay state on alarm / command 7 Relay state on alarm / command 8 Parameter value (*) Holding-. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. idle Former State Idle Idle Idle idle Idle Idle Idle Former State Former State Former State Former State Former State Former State Former State 20 to 250 ms
Parameter / HMI Configuring application parameters
Parameter value (*) 1 - 2 - 3 -
Restitution / Holding in operation
4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 -
1 to 3000 ms
Type of reception commands 1/2
Permissive tripping Blocking Remote trigger
TABLE 11 APPLICATION PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION * For more details on delay parameters, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-008. 6.4.8 Configuring alarm parameters Refer to the Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter / HMI Configuring alarms parameters Minor alarm threshold on bit error rate (BER) Parameter value 1. 00E -3 1. 00E-4 1. 00E -2 1.00E-5 1.00E-3 NO Major 1 to 30 s NO Major 1 to 20 ms 2.5 sec 2.5 sec 2.5 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 1.00 E-6
Major alarm threshold on bit error rate 1. 00E -1 (BER) Alarm on prolonged command Type Duration Communication time alarm Type Delay Output delay major alarm 1 Output delay major alarm 2 Output delay major minor alarm 1 Output delay major minor alarm 2 YES Minor ................... YES Minor ................... 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec
TABLE 12 ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION 6.4.9 Entering comments Refer to the Entering comments in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter / HMI Entering comments Name of source station Name of destination station Comments TABLE 13 COMMENTS PARAMETERS SHEET DIGITAL VERSION 6.4.10 Saving the configuration Send the configuration to the DIP and save it (refer to the Configuring the Windows file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter). Parameter value
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 6.5 Configuring DIP Single tone analog version
For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP Single tone analog, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter. Each step of the procedure corresponds to a paragraph in the HMI chapter. The configuration procedure is as follows: 6.5.1 Creating a user password Configuring General Parameters Configuring Sender Parameters Configuring Receiver Parameters Configuring I/O parameters Configuring alarm parameters Saving the configuration
Creating a user password Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password. To create a user password, refer to DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP Analog.
6.5.2
Configuring General Parameters Refer to the Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: The grayed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters. Default parameter values are in bold. Parameter / HMI Configuring general parameters Number of orders IRIG-B Mode selection Logical address* Limitation of the number of events and alarms / Limitation of histories to 255 HMI Speed Parameter value 2 commands Enabled Normal . Yes (255) 19200 bit / s 2400 bit / s 600 bit / s Disabled Hour and minutes Daily Minutes Hourly 4 commands Disabled Extended 0 to 255 No (1785) 4800 bit / s 1200 bit / s
Link test
H mn .mn
Comments / Source station Comments / Destination station Comments / Comments TABLE 14 GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION * This parameter is not used currently.
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 24/44 6.5.3 Configuring Sender Parameters
Refer to the Configuring the sender parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter name / HMI Configuring Parameter value sender parameters Sender LF Band Bandwidth Configuring Sender LF Band Sender LF Band Guard Configuring Sender LF Band Guard source Configuring Guard source Transmission level / Guard Transmission level / Frequency 1 Transmission level / Frequency 2 Transmission level / Frequency 3 Transmission level / Frequency 4 Input Validation delay / Command 1 Input Validation delay / Command 2 Input Validation delay / Command 3 Input Validation delay / Command 4 Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 1 Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 2 Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 3 Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 4 Type of application / Command 1 300-2000 Hz 300-2400 Hz 300-3400 Hz 2240 Hz 2600 Hz 3680 Hz Internal External Holding-. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping 20 to 500 ms 0 to 5ms -30 to +6dBm
Type of application / Command 2
TABLE 15 SENDER PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 6.5.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters
Refer to the Configuring the receiver parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter name / HMI Configuring receiver parameters Useful band/ Commands Useful band/ Guard Reception / Guard level Command / Guard relative frequency level Holding delay command 1 Holding delay command 2 Holding delay command 3 Holding delay command 4 Command 1 Relay State on AI/ Configuring Relay State on AI Command 2 Relay State on AI/ Configuring Relay State on AI Command 3 Relay State on AI/ Configuring Relay State on AI Command 4 Relay State on AI/ Configuring Relay State on AI Command 1 Protection Scheme/ Configuring protection schemes Command 2 Protection Scheme/ Configuring protection schemes Command 3 Protection Scheme/ Configuring protection schemes Command 4 Protection Scheme/ Configuring protection schemes Unblocking command 1 Unblocking command 2 Unblocking command 3 Unblocking command 4 Unblocking threshold Unblocking validation delay Unblocking holding delay Parameter Values 300-2000 Hz 300-3400 Hz 2100/2300 Hz 3500/3800 Hz 300-2400 Hz 2400/2660 Hz - 40 to 0 dBm
/.0 to -6 dBm normal version /0 to -16 dBm advanced version Idle State Idle State Idle State Idle State Former State Former State Former State Former State 0 to 3000 ms
Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Unblocking Unblocking Unblocking Unblocking . . . - 20 to -10 dB 5 to 100 ms 30 to 500 ms
TABLE 16 RECEIVER PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 26/44 6.5.5 Configuring I/O parameters
Refer to the Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter / HMI I/O configuration Configuring I/O boards Command 1 Input Filter Delay/ Configuring Input Filter Delay Command 2 Input Filter Delay/ Configuring Input Filter Delay Command 3 Input Filter Delay/ Configuring Input Filter Delay Command 4 Input Filter Delay/ Configuring Input Filter Delay Command 1 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Command 2 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Command 3 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Command 4 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Parameter value 1 board . . . . IN1 IN1 or IN2 IN3 IN3 or IN4 IN5 IN5 or IN6 IN7 IN7 or IN8 2 boards - 0 to 3 ms - 0 to 3 ms - 0 to 3 ms - 0 to 3 ms IN2 IN1 and IN2 IN4 IN3 and IN4 IN6 IN5 and IN6 IN8 IN7 and IN8
TABLE 17 I/O PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 6.5.6 Alarms parameters Single tone Refer to the Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP Parameter name / HMI Configuring alarms parameters Alarm on external input Parameter value YES Type Minor Delay ................... Input Command Duration Alarm YES Type Minor Duration ................... Loss of Signal Alarm Locking alarm Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 1 Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 2 Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 1 Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 2 Threshold ................... Delay ................... YES Delay ................... 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 2.5 sec 2.5 sec 2.5 sec 2.5 sec NO
Major 0 to 2.5 s NO Major 0.5 to 10 s -15 to 6dBr 1 to 10 s NO 0.5 to 10 s 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
TABLE 18 ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 6.5.7 Saving the configuration Save the configuration (refer to the Configuring the File menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter). 6.6 Configuring DIP Analogue Dual Tone For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP Dual tone analog, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter. The configuration procedure is as follows: 6.6.1 Creating a password Configuring General Parameters Configuring Sender Parameters Configuring Receiver Parameters Configuring I/O parameters Configuring alarm parameters Saving the configuration
Creating a password Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password. To create a user password, refer to DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP Analog.
6.6.2
Configuring general parameters - Dual tone analog version Refer to the Configuring the general parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: The grayed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters. Default parameter values are in bold.
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 28/44 Parameter / HMI Configuring general parameters IRIG-B Logical address Limitation of the number of events and alarms / Limitation of histories to 255 HMI Speed Parameter value on . Yes (255)* 19200 bit / s 2400 bit / s 600 bit / s Disabled Hour and minutes Daily Hourly off 0 to 255
No (1785) 4800 bit / s 1200 bit / s
Link test Minutes
H mn ....mn
Comments / Source station Comments / Destination station Comments / Comments TABLE 19 GENERAL PARAMETERS DUAL TONE * Limitation to 255 when the DIP is supervised.. 6.6.3 Configuring sender parameters - Dual tone version Refer to the Configuring the sender parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter name / HMI Configuring receiver parameters Useful band / Commands Parameter value 300-1900 Hz 670-2260 Hz 1040-2630 Hz 1400-3000 Hz 2000-3600 Hz Holding-. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. 20 to 500 ms -30 to +6dBm 400-2000 Hz 850-2450 Hz 1220-2810 Hz 1590-3180 Hz
Transmission level / Guard Transmission level / Frequency 1 Transmission level / Frequency 2 Transmission level / Frequency 3 Transmission level / Frequency 4 Transmission level / Frequency 5 Transmission level / Frequency 6 Transmission level / Frequency 7 Transmission level / Frequency 8 Input Validation delay / Command 1 Input Validation delay / Command 2 Input Validation delay / Command 3 Input Validation delay / Command 4 Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 1 Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 2
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP Parameter name / HMI Configuring receiver parameters Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 3 Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 4 Type of application / Command 1
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 29/44 Parameter value Holding -. Pulsed -. Holding -. Pulsed -. Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced
TABLE 20 SENDER PARAMETERS DUAL TONE 6.6.4 Configuring receiver parameters - Dual tone version Refer to the Configuring the receiver parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter name / HMI Configuring receiver parameters Useful band / Commands Parameter value 300-1900 Hz 670-2260 Hz 1040-2630 Hz 1400-3000 Hz 2000-3600 Hz 400-2000 Hz 850-2450 Hz 1220-2810 Hz 1590-3180 Hz - 40 to 0 dBm
Reception / Guard level Command / Guard relative frequency level Holding delay command 1 Holding delay command 2 Holding delay command 3 Holding delay command 4 Relay state on alarm / command 1 Relay state on alarm / command 2 Relay state on alarm / command 3 Relay state on alarm / command 4 Type of application / Command 1
/.6 to -6 dBm normal version /0 to -16 dBm advanced version idle Idle Idle Idle Former State Former State Former State Former State Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced
Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 30/44 Parameter name / HMI Configuring receiver parameters Type of application / Command 2
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP Parameter value Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Permissive tripping Blocking Direct tripping Unblocking Unblocking Unblocking Unblocking . . - 20 to 10 dB 5 to 100 ms 30 to 500 ms Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced Reinforced
Unblocking command 1 Unblocking command 2 Unblocking command 3 Unblocking command 4 Unblocking threshold Unblocking Validation delay Unblocking Holding delay
TABLE 21 RECEIVER PARAMETERS DUAL TONE ANALOG 6.6.5 Configuring I/O parameters - Dual tone version Refer to the Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter / HMI I/O configuration Configuring I/O boards Command 1 Input Filter Delay/ Configuring Input Filter Delay Command 2 Input Filter Delay/ Configuring Input Filter Delay Command 3 Input Filter Delay/ Configuring Input Filter Delay Command 4 Input Filter Delay/ Configuring Input Filter Delay Command 1 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Command 2 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Command 3 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Command 4 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Parameter value 1 board IN1 IN1 or IN2 IN3 IN3 or IN4 IN5 IN5 or IN6 IN7 IN7 or IN8 2 boards - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms) - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms) - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms) - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms) IN2 IN1 and IN2 IN4 IN3 and IN4 IN6 IN5 and IN6 IN8 IN7 and IN8
TABLE 22 I/O PARAMETERS SHEET DUAL TONE
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 6.6.6 Configuring alarms parameters - Dual tone version
Refer to the Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details. Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet: Parameter name / HMI Configuring alarms parameters Alarm on external input Type Input Command Duration Alarm Parameter value YES Minor YES Type Minor Duration ........................ Loss of Signal Alarm Noise alarm Threshold ................... Delay ........................ Threshold ................... Delay ........................ Alarm on link test failure Locking alarm Minor YES Delay ........................ Saturation threshold alarm Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 1 Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 2 Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 1 Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 2 ................... 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 0 sec 2.5 sec 2.5 sec 2.5 sec 2.5 sec Delay ....................... NO Major 0 to 2.5 s NO Major 0.5 to 10 s -16 to 6dBr 1 to 10 s -6 to +12 dBr 1 to 10 s Major NO 0.5 to 10 s +8 to +14 dBr 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
TABLE 23 ALARMS PARAMETERS DUAL TONE 6.6.7 Saving the configuration Save the configuration (refer to the Configuring the File menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter). 6.7 Final status of the configuration step At the end of the configuration step: The passwords are created. The configuration file is saved and ready to be sent to the DIP unit.
7.

The objective of this step consists in checking: compliance of the configuration file saved with the equipment, the operational status of the DIP equipment.
7.1
Initial status The configuration file is saved and ready to be sent to the DIP.
7.2
Checking procedure Send the configuration to the DIP which is reset
For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the Sending a configuration file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter. For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the Sending a configuration file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP Analog chapter. Check the status of LEDs after the reset and lack of alarms.
If LEDs report an alarm status: Read the alarms.
For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the Reading alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter. For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the Reading alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter. Once the alarm identified, apply the corresponding resolution procedure of the TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION in the MAINTENANCE chapter.
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 7.3 Final status
At the end of this step, the DIP equipment is configured and ready to be used.
Start
Send the configuration
Alarm state OK after reset ?
No Yes State of hardware alarms OK ?
No Yes Read the alarms and record the nature of the fault displayed.
Repair (See Tests and troubleshooting)
End
D0613 FRa
FIGURE 7 - TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION
8.
8.1
OPERATING CHECKS
Initial status The DIP equipment is ready to be used, but not connected.
8.2
Procedure This procedure consists in: Checking user connections (rear panel) and the jumpers 1-2 Terminal block presence. Set the date and time on the unit. Save the configuration file. Clear the event and alarm log. Perform self-checks. Perform online checks.
Start
Check user connections (rear connectors)
Set the time on the unit Menu <Date/Write/Local>
Save the configuration in a backup file
Menu <Read/Local> Command <Configuration>
Menu <File> <File/Save>
Clear the alarms and events log
Check locally
Check on line
End
D0614FRa
FIGURE 7 FINAL CHECKS AND CONFIGURATION
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 8.3 8.3.1 Self-checks Alarms forcing Alarm forcing allows to check the operational status of alarms. To force an alarm:
For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the Forcing alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter. For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the Forcing alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter. 8.3.2 Maintenance forcing commands When the DIP equipment is not connected to the transmission medium, apply the maintenance forcing commands and check the results. For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the Maintenance in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter. For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the DIP Maintenance Menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter. 8.3.3 Forcing PLC commands Only when a PLC is present, use the PLC forcing commands and check the results. Refer to the Forcing PLC commands in the Human Machine InterfaceDIP Analog. 8.4 Online checks When two DIPs are linked, no alarm must appear. Otherwise, refer to the maintenance manual
8.5
Final status The DIP unit is fully operational.
9.
9.1
APPENDIX A
Implantation diagram of the UT148 / UT148D board
IR 1xx communication interface board
Location of optional ME50 board
Optional IRIG-BIR184 board
Timer
D0131 Frd
Status of the lamps in normal operation: V1 V8 V7 Green on Green fast flashing Off
The IR1xx communication interface board may be absent in case of optical transmission.
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 9.2 Implantation diagram of the SR11x board and jumper settings
K4 K3 K2 K1 V5 V6 V7 V8
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
P1 S5 S4 S3 S2
P3
K12
MAX 7000
U4
K11 K10 K9
V1 V2 V3 V4
S1
K8 K7 K6 K5
P2
D0132XXa
Position of the jumpers The jumpers S2 to S5 allow selecting the range of voltage values according to the level of the input command. Position 1-2 2-3 SR114 220 V 250 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc SR114D 220 V 250 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc SR115 48 V -127 Vdc 24 Vdc SR116 110 V -127 Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 38/44 9.3 Implantation diagram of the SR200 board and jumper settings
Position of the jumpers The jumpers JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 allow selecting the range of voltage values according to the level of the input command. Position 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 SR200 24Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc 110-127 Vdc 220-250 Vdc Minimum 18 Vdc 36 Vdc 83 Vdc 165 Vdc Maximum 30 Vdc 75 Vdc 158 Vdc 312 Vdc
If the daughter board FI005 is present on the SR200 board, the jumpers must be set to 1-2, in which case acquisition of the command is ensured by dry loop. The position of the FI005 board is marked by its outline in the figure above.
The jumpers JP9 to JP32 allow to fit (or not) the static relay in addition to the mechanical relay. Position 1 2 JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12 JP13 JP14 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP18 JP19 JP20 JP21 JP22 JP23 JP24 JP25 JP26 JP27 JP28 JP29 JP30 JP31 JP32 Command copy output on mechanical relay and static relay in parallel Command copy output on mechanical relay only the allocation of the copy outputs is detailed in the INSTALLATION part Command output on mechanical relay and static relay in parallel Command output on mechanical relay only Position 2 3 Command 1 or 5 2 or 6 3 or 7 4 or 8
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 40/44 9.4 Implantation diagram of the AL137 and AL140 board
The +5v and 0v test points allow to check the voltage delivered by the board. The S1 switch allows power on the DIP. F1 : Protection fuse : 800mA , T, 250V,20/5
9.5
Implantation diagram of the AL139 board
There are two versions of AL139 board, which differ only by the CONV.1 converter. The +5v and 0v test points allow to check the voltage delivered by the board. The INT.1 switch allows to power on the DIP. F1 : Protection fuse : 3,15A , T, 250V,20/5
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 9.6 Implantation diagram of the IR183 board
C30 R32
C28 C20
C40 +
C41
U14
+ C9
C 31 C34
C32
U8
C10
U9
R24
Q1
C4
C15
U7
C7
U6
C14
U13
S4
C1
C2
S6
R14
C5
C8
R13
R19
R15
U5
U3
U10
S2
C39
C11
C12
C16
R17 R21
Q5
D7
S5
R18
R20
Q7
Impedance of the BF output 12 By default S5 600 S6 P9-P10 = transmission measurement points. P11-P12 = reception measurement points. High impedance 2-3
Q6
D8
D9
E1
E6
R3
E4
E5
E2
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 42/44 9.7 Implantation diagram of the FI002 board and jumper settings
Each filter is programmed via 3 jumpers J1x, J2x and J3x. Each jumper is identified on the board. The jumper positions are indicated in the figure below:
Command 4 filter
Command 3 filter
Command 2 filter
Command 1 filter
D0495FRa
Each filter can be configured for the nominal voltage of the input command, as specified in the table below. Input command voltage 48 Vdc 110 - 127 Vdc 220 Vdc J1 Closed Open Open J2 Open Closed Closed J3 Open Closed Open
Commissioning e-terragridcom DIP 9.8 Implantation diagram of the IR185 board and jumper settings
Red FGPA not loaded LED Rotating switch

J1
90 1
Test jumper
Power supply jumper
JP3 JP2 JP1

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Tx LED Rx LED
J3
1 D D2
U4
U3
U2
JTAG
U9 U8 U10
Green LED on
D0496 Frb
Rotating switch J1 Test mode N=0
JP1 /JP2 /JP3 1-2
U11
Normal maintenance
N = 1 to 8
2-3
4 56
SP1
78
1 2 3
23
JP5
J2
Speed N/A The test mode is used in the factory to test the board without DIP connection Nx64 kbps
DIP/EN CM/B23 Page 44/44 9.9 Implantation diagram of the IR187 board and jumper settings
TP12
TP11
TP10 GND TP9 GND

D2
J1
9
7 8
J3
SP1
J2
JTAG/RS232
TP8 GND TP4
TP1
TP3
TP2
TRACO POWER
The two jumpers JP1 and JP2 and position of the rotating switch allow to configure the board as follow: Coding wheel J1 IR182 mode C37.94 Mode N=1 N = 1 to 8 1-2 2-3 JP1 2-3 1-2 JP2 Speed 256 kbps Nx64 kbps
5 6
D1
0 1
2 3
JP2
1 2 3
JP1
1 2 3
SFP module cage
TP7 TP5 +2.5V GND
TP6 +5V
D0646FRa
Maintenance e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN MT/A23
MAINTENANCE
DIP/EN MT/A23 Page 1/40
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INTRODUCTION MONITORING

Monitoring LEDs Messages LED Relay information Push buttons
5 6 7
7 9 9 10
4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6
HMI MAINTENANCE FEATURES

Snapshot window Maintenance test commands Instant reading of alarms DIGITAL DIP HMI Reading an alarms list DIP DIGITAL Reading alarms DIP IHM ANALOG Reading an alarms list DIP ANALOG
11
11 11 11 12 12 13
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4

Checks before repair Fault isolation procedure Troubleshooting procedures Warning and error messages
14
14 14 14 33
6. 7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5
CLASSIFICATION OF FAULTS UPDATE OF THE DIP FIRMWARE

Overview Prior conditions Installing files on the PC Transferring update files Connecting the DIP
35 37
37 37 37 38 40
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 INDICATION LED AND PUSH BUTTONS FIGURE 2 POWER ON ALARMS FIGURE 3 POWER ON ALARMS COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FAULT FIGURE 4 POWER ON ALARMS SRXXX COHERENCE FAULT FIGURE 5 POWER ON ALARMS IRIG-B COHERENCE FAULT FIGURE 6 POWER ON ALARMS CONFIGURATION CHECKSUM FAULT FIGURE 7 POWER ON ALARMS LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST FAULT FIGURE 8 HARDWARE STATUS FIGURE 9 HARDWARE STATUS - SRXXX MODULE TEST FAULT FIGURE 10 HARDWARE STATUS - TERMINAL BLOCK PRESENCE FAULT FIGURE 11 HARDWARE STATUS - AL13X OE AL14X SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAULT FIGURE 12 HARDWARE STATUS - TIME-STAMP BATTERY VOLTAGE FAULT FIGURE 13 HARDWARE STATUS - LINK TEST ALARM FIGURE 14 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION FIGURE 15 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION BIT ERROR RATE FIGURE 16 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION SYNCH LOSS FIGURE 17 REMOTE ALARMS FIGURE 18 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FIGURE 19 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION TRANSMISSION TIME FIGURE 20 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION TX COMMAND TIME FIGURE 21 COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG VERSION FIGURE 22 COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG VERSION NO GUARD / LOW LEVEL / NOISE - BLOCKING FIGURE 23 COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG VERSION EXTERNAL ALARM FIGURE 24 MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES FIGURE 25 MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES (CONTD) 7 16 17 17 18 19 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 29 30 31 32 33 34
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION A B C D DATE 28/12/2000 24/04/2001 05/11/2004 14/11/2007 COMMENTS Original issue Added the optical interface ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version New structure. New writing. Added a paragraph on updating the firmware, creation of the test and fault isolation procedure. Minor correction Version 2.2 Minor corrections, added SR200 I/O and IR187 optical interface. Version 2.3
E A22 B22 A23
29/02/2008 20/07/2009 23/12/2009 04/01/2011
BLANK PAGE
1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
(1)
(1)
2.
INTRODUCTION
This section includes two parts: Tests and repair: this part presents a classification of faults, describes the maintenance tools and indicates the repair procedures. Firmware updating procedure.
3.
MONITORING
The monitoring resources available with the DIP equipment are the following: Monitoring information by LEDs and relays, Notification messages,
3.1
Monitoring LEDs The LEDs, located on the front face of the DIP equipment display monitoring information (refer to table 1 - Indication of the LEDs). The systems operation is monitored by these LEDs, as well as by four alarm relays (two dedicated to major alarms and two others to minor alarms). Alarms requiring maintenance action are notified by the status of these LEDs are relays.
Opt . link
MAIN POWER
AUX . POWER
MAJO R ALARM
M INO R ALARM
Optical interface indicator lights
Power supply indicator lights

D0136 FRb
FIGURE 1 INDICATION LED AND PUSH BUTTONS The following tables indicate the information notified by the LEDs. The information of the V2, V4 and V6 LEDs depend on the ANALOG or DIGITAL version, the appropriate lines are displayed in grey in the table.

Main power supply Auxiliary power supply
Description
UT148
Activity
Lamp
Color
Comment
Power supply voltage present Major alarm
x x x x x x x
Voltage present Voltage absent Normal Alarm Normal Alarm Normal Loopback Normal Fault Normal Blocked Normal Remote loopback equipment Synchronized Non synchronized Normal Remote alarm Normal V4 V6 V4 V2 V5 V9 V3
Green Off Off Red Off Red Off Yellow Off Red Off Yellow Off Yellow Green Off Off Red Green Off V6 Off Red Orange V2 Orange
Fixed
Fixed
GENERAL
Minor alarm
Fixed
Local loop back
Fixed
Battery fault
Fixed
Command outputs
Fixed
Remote loopback
Fixed Fixed
DIGITAL
Receiver synchronization Remote alarm
x x x
Fixed Fixed
ANALOG
Rx / Guard level
No guard signal / Low level Normal
No guard signal / Low level Test message emission Link test fault TABLE 1 LED INDICATION
Fixed Fixed for 2s Fixed
Link test
Maintenance e-terragridcom DIP UT148 lamp V1 (STATUS) Green on Green on Green on Red fast flashing UT148 lamp V8 (STATUS) Green fast flashing Yellow fast flashing Red fast flashing Red fast flashing Red slow flashing Fast toggling from green to yellow then red
DIP/EN MT/A23 Page 9/40 UT148 lamp V7 (STATUS) Off Off Off Off Off
Teledetection status Normal operation Normal operation after cold start Initializing Alarm on power on test
Configuration writing in Flash Red slow flashing EPROM Storage status Fast toggling from green (time stamp battery isolated) to yellow then red Maintenance Green on
Fast green flashing or fast Yellow on yellow flashing Fast green flashing or fast Yellow fast yellow flashing flashing Yellow slow flashing Green at 1 s rate of data transmitted Red slow flashing Yellow fast flashing Yellow fast flashing Yellow fast flashing
Remote equipment loopback Green on Waiting for code transfer for Flash memory Transferring code Writing code in Flash memory Yellow slow flashing Green at 0 s rate of data transmitted Red slow flashing
TABLE 2 INDICATION OF STATUS AND MAINTENANCE LEDS Mode All IR187 IR182 Or IR187 LED TX TX /RX RX TX TX RX RX IR185 Or IR187 TX TX RX RX RX Signaling Green on Alternate orange flashing Green on Slow yellow flashing Fast red flashing Slow yellow flashing Fast red flashing Yellow on Red on Red on Yellow on Red flashing Status Normal emission No SFP module Normal reception No signal from UT148 Transmitter fault No Signal received activity Low optical power level (LOS) Yellow Bit No signal from UT148 No optical signal received (LOS) AIS reception Frame loss (LOF)
TABLE 3 INDICATION OF LEDS ON OPTICAL INTERFACE 3.2 Messages Notification messages are displayed to notify the user in case of error and risk of untimely commands. They also provide instructions for fault resolving. 3.3 LED Relay information The information of the MAJOR ALARM and MINOR ALARM LEDs (see Figure 1) is associated with the alarm status of the relays.
Each alarm is associated with two independent contacts, with a closing time (0 s, 2.5 s, 5 s or 10 s) which can be configured with the HMI (refer to the chapter Human Machine Interface). These contacts are normally open in standard or normally closed with the AL142 and AL143 boards. 3.4 Push buttons The S1 and S2 push buttons are accessible when the door is open (see Figure 1). The S1 button allows to reset the DIP unit. The S2 button: is not used in the digital version of the equipment (factory test), is used to launch a link test in the analog version.
4.
HMI MAINTENANCE FEATURES

The RS232C communication port fitted on the front panel is an ultra low voltage circuit (ULV) ensuring basic isolation against electric shock. When powering on the teleprotection, the terminals of this port must not be touched to prevent any risk of electric shock in case of fault. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software, it must not be connected permanently. The front panel mounted RJ45 communication port is an extra low voltage circuit ensuring basic insulation against electric shock. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software.
(1) (1)
4.1
Snapshot window The HMI software allows monitoring alarms via an instant status window and reading event and alarm files. Events and alarms are saved in a file, accessible via the History menu. The alarms monitored depend on the type of DIP, DIGITAL or ANALOG. The corresponding alarm windows and files are described separately, in the following paragraphs. According to the version of the DIP, refer to the appropriate paragraphs.
4.2
Maintenance test commands The maintenance instructions, used to analyze malfunctions and launch tests, are available via the HMI: Locking to lock / unlock either the link between units or the link with the protection relay connected to the unit. Loop to launch a loop between the transmitter and receiver. Forcing commands to check availability of features. Interface forcing (only on DIP DIGITAL). Reset.
For more information on the use of these MAINTENANCE functions, refer to the Maintenance Menu in the DIP HMI chapter for the DIGITAL or ANALOG version. 4.3 Instant reading of alarms DIGITAL DIP HMI Refer to the Instant reading of alarms in the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter. The alarms monitored are: Power on alarms Flash EPROM check DSP internal RAM check External RAM check CRC configuration Communication interface SR board missing Failed IRIG-B loopback test Failed loopback test
DIP/EN MT/A23 Page 12/40 Alarms on the status of the equipment Test fault I/O board no.1 Fault terminal block no.1 Test fault I/O board no.2 Fault terminal block no.2 Main power supply fault Auxiliary power supply fault Battery voltage fault Command timeout
Alarms on communication Bit error rate / MAJAL Bit error rate / MINAL Loss of synchronization Remote major alarm Remote minor alarm Transmission time
For more information, refer to the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter. 4.4 Reading an alarms list DIP DIGITAL Refer to the Reading the list of alarms in the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter. 4.5 Reading alarms DIP IHM ANALOG Refer to the Instant reading of alarms in the HMI-DIP ANALOG chapter. The alarms monitored are: Power on alarms Failed Flash memory test Failed internal DSP RAM test Failed external DSP RAM test CRC error configuration database Communication interface error I/O power supply board missing Missing IRIG-B Failed loopback test
Maintenance e-terragridcom DIP Alarms on the status of the equipment Failed test I/O board no.1 Missing terminal block no.1 Failed test I/O board no.2 No terminal block no.2 Main power supply fault Auxiliary source fault Battery voltage fault Link test alarm
Alarms on communication 4.6 Low level alarm Blocking External alarm Noise Tx command time alarm
Reading an alarms list DIP ANALOG Refer to the Reading the list of alarms in the HMI-DIP ANALOG chapter.
5.
5.1

Checks before repair In case of malfunction, check the following points before applying the fault isolation procedure: Proper application of the power supply voltage to the DIP (power supply LED not lit). Wiring. External connection and circuit to which the DIP is connected (protection side, transmission medium, power supply, external alarm). Aspect of the mother board.
If communication between the PC HMI and the DIP cannot be set up, check the cables connection on the DIP side and PC side. Open the front panel of the DIP and check, if required, the internal connection between the RS 232 connector and the UT 148 board. 5.2 Fault isolation procedure Most faults are notified by the LEDs (see 3.1). If a LED reports an alarm: 1. 2. 3. 4. Determine the cause of the alarm using table 1. Connect the PC and launch the HMI. Read the alarm instant and notification messages. Apply the repair procedure associated with the alarm (refer to the next paragraph Startup procedure). Note: When replacing a board, apply the startup procedure (refer to the COMMISSIONING chapter). In case of complex fault which cannot be resolved by a repair procedure (several simultaneous faults or failures with multiples impacts), use the maintenance commands and test tools (see 4.2) to analyze or process the fault (a reset command may be useful). 5.3 Troubleshooting procedures How to use this paragraph: In case of alarm notification, refer to the associated figures: Figures 2 to 7 Power on alarms (Digital and Analog) Figures 8 to 13 Equipment status (Digital and Analog) Figures 14 to 21 Communication alarms - Digital version Figures 22 to 24 Communication alarms Analog version Note: In the following figures, the indications of the LEDs have been translated. However, the actual indications on the front panel are shown in figure 1.
Maintenance e-terragridcom DIP PRECAUTIONS
INSERTING ELECTRONIC MODULES AND BOARDS: THE ELECTRONIC MODULES AND BOARDS MUST BE NEITHER INSERTED NOR REMOVED FROM LIVE EQUIPMENT UNDER PAIN OF DAMAGE.
WHEN CHANGING A BOARD, CHECK THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION OF THE SPARE BOARD, WHICH MUST BE IDENTICAL.
BEFORE ANY INTERVENTION ON THE OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD, REMOVE ITS FASTENING SCREWS ON THE REAR PANEL.
THE OPTICAL BOARDS MUST BE FASTENED WITH THEIR SCREWS BEFORE CONNECTING THE OPTICAL FIBERS.
Power on alarms
Alarms at power on
All these faults are irreversible major faults
SUPPLY 1 MAJOR ALARM
SUPPLY 2
MINOR ALARM
Fault:
Flash EPROM DSP RAM RAM timer
Replaces the UT148 module 148

Maintenance Lien
AL. STATUT BAT.
Maint
Verr
B.L
B.D/T
SYNC
Communication interface fault
See figure 3
I/O board coherence fault
See figure 4
IRIG-B coherence fault
See figure 5
Configuration checksum fault
See figure 6
Maintenance
Lien
STATUT
Maint
Verr
B.L
B.D/T
SYNC
AL.
BAT.
Local loopback test fault
See figure 3 D0137 FRd
FIGURE 2 POWER ON ALARMS
Communication interface fault
The processor does not recognise the communication interface board
Check that the Irxxx board is present
Is the board present ?
No
Insert the Irxxx board in its slot
Yes
Check the coherence / configuration of the interface board
Configuration correct ?
No
Change the configuration or the Irxxx module
Yes Fault of the UT148 or Irxxx board
Fault of one of the modules
Change the UT148 board and Irxxx board D0138 FRb
FIGURE 3 POWER ON ALARMS COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FAULT
SRxxx coherence fault
The configuration does not correspond to the number of boards present .
Check that the number of SRxxx defined in the configuration matches the number of boards present.
Coherence correct ?
No
Change the configuration or install a 2nd SRxxx board
Yes
Fault of the UT148 or SRxxx boards or FB180 mother board
Change the faulty module
D0139FRe
FIGURE 4 POWER ON ALARMS SRXXX COHERENCE FAULT
IRIG-B coherence fault
The processor does not recognise the IRIG-B interface board
Check that the IRIG-B interface board is present
Is the board present ?
No Insert the IRIG-B board in its slot
Yes Check the coherence / configuration of the IRIG-B board
No Config OK ?
Change the configuration or IRIG-B board
Yes Fault of the UT148 and/or IRIG-B board
Change the UT148 board and/or IRIG-B board

D0140 FRa
FIGURE 5 POWER ON ALARMS IRIG-B COHERENCE FAULT
Checksum fault
The configuration saved in the Flash Eprom is corrupted
Reload the configuration from the HMI
Fault cleared ?
Yes
END
No
Fault of the UT148 module
Faulty component on the UT148 board
Change the UT148 module
D0141FRb
FIGURE 6 POWER ON ALARMS CONFIGURATION CHECKSUM FAULT
Local loopback test fault
The local loopback test on the communication interface board has failed
Fault on the Irxx communication interface board or the UT148 board
Change the Irxx board
Fault cleared ?
Yes
END
Yes
Fault of the UT148 module

D0142 FRb
FIGURE 7 POWER ON ALARMS LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST FAULT
Hardware related alarms
Hardware alarms
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
SR11x test fault

see figure 9
MAJOR ALARM MINOR ALARM
Operating terminal block present
see figure 10
AL1xx power supply voltage
see figure 11
MAIN POWER SUPPLY MAJOR ALARM MINOR ALARM
Battery voltage
see figure 12
MTN
VERR
BOUCLE
SYNC AL DIST
ETAT
BAT
Link test (analog version only)

Major alarm
see figure 13
MAIN POWER SUPPLY MAJOR ALARM MINOR ALARM
D0143FRd
FIGURE 8 HARDWARE STATUS
SRxxx module test fault
Record the number of the faulty board
Board no.1: high position Board no.2: low position (4 commands and 8 commands option)
Read the version of the SRxxx programmable logic
Read / Local / Version
No.1
Board no. ?
No.2
EPLD SRxxx(1) =ZZ341x-yy (X: version and yy: revision)
EPLD SRxxx(2) =ZZ341x-yy (X: version and yy: revision)
Firmware version correct ?
No
Firmware version correct ?
No
Version firmware correcte ?
Yes
EPLD of SRxxx no.1 not programmed
Yes
EPLD of SRxxx no.2 not programmed
Change board SRxxx no.1 (high)
Change board SRxxx no.2 (low) D0144 FRc
FIGURE 9 HARDWARE STATUS - SRXXX MODULE TEST FAULT
Terminal block presence fault
Are terminal blocks P10 to P13 present at the back ?
No
Connect terminal blocks P10 to P13
Yes
Are the presence bridges fitted onto terminal blocks P10 to P13 ?
No
See User Manual
Yes
Install the presence bridges on connectors P10 to P13
Fault of the UT148 and/ or SRxxx and or FB mother boards
Change the faulty module

D0145 FRc
FIGURE 10 HARDWARE STATUS - TERMINAL BLOCK PRESENCE FAULT
AL13x / AL14x power supply fault
Only in case of redundant power supplies: one of the two AL13x / AL14x modules does not work
Record the number of the faulty board
Board no.1: left Board no.2: right
Is the supply indicator of the faulty board lit ?
Yes
Change the faulty AL13x / AL14x module
No
Is the faulty board powered on (ON/OFF switch) ?
Yes
Power on the board
No
Check the fuse
No Fuse OK ?
Change the fuse on the faulty board
Yes
Change the faulty AL13x / AL14x module
Faulty AL13x / AL14x module

D0146FRc
FIGURE 11 HARDWARE STATUS - AL13X OE AL14X SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAULT
Battery voltage fault
Change the UT148 board
Power cap battery faulty

D 0147 FRb
FIGURE 12 HARDWARE STATUS - TIME-STAMP BATTERY VOLTAGE FAULT
Link test fault
OR
Fault on the IR183/UT148 boards of the local or remote DIP
Problem with the transmission medium or threshold not adapted to the flow
Change the IR183 board on the local DIP and restart the link test Check the transmission medium
Fault cleared ?
END
Change the UT148 board on the local DIP and restart the link test
Fault cleared ?
END
Change the UT148 and/or IR183 board on the remote DIP

D0148 FRb
FIGURE 13 HARDWARE STATUS - LINK TEST ALARM NOTE: Before performing the diagnostic, use the HMI to reset the local equipment, then read the alarms again.
Alarms on communication DIP Digital
Communication alarms (digital version)
Bit error rate alarm
See figure 15
Synch loss alarm
See figure 16
Maintenance
Loc . MTN LCK Dist.
Link
SYNC REM AL. STATUS BAT.
LOOP
Major or minor remote alarm
See figure 17
Communication interface alarm
See figure 18
Transmission time alarm
See figure 19
Tx command time alarm
See figure 20
MAIN POWER
Minor/major alarm programmable by HMI
AUX.POWER
D0149 FRd
FIGURE 14 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION
Bit error rate / MAJOR AL.
Bit error rate / MINOR AL.
Problem in the transmission medium or connection
Check quality of the transmission medium
Check the connections between the DIP and the ETCD

D0150 FRa
FIGURE 15 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION BIT ERROR RATE
Loss of synch
Check that the configuration of the two link devices is compliant, as well as the link
Number of commands OK ?
No
Yes
Number of boards OK ?
Yes
No
Master / slave OK ?
No
Yes
Logical address OK ?
No
Yes
Clock config. OK ?
No
Yes
Fault on IRxxx or UT148
Change the configuration
Change the IRxxx module
Fault cleared ?
Yes
No
END
END
D0151 FRb
FIGURE 16 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION SYNCH LOSS
Major remote alarm
Minor remote alarm
Record the nature of the fault on the remote unit
Menu: <Read> <Remote> <Instant alarms>
Repair the remote unit
END D0152 FRa
FIGURE 17 REMOTE ALARMS
Communication interface alarm
No reception signal ?
Yes
Check the ETCD signal
No
Lack of rhythm ?
Yes
No
Lack of rhythm, only with V11 interface and G703.1 codirectional interface
Breach of HDB3 code, with G703.6 interface (2 Mbps)
UT148 board or IRxx board fault Check the ETCD clock signal Change the UT148 board and IRxx board D0153 FRa
FIGURE 18 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Transmission time alarm
Problem with the transmission medium or threshold not adapted to the flow
Increase the detection threshold of the transmission time alarm
OR
Check the transmission medium D0154FRa
FIGURE 19 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION TRANSMISSION TIME
Tx command time alarm fault
Local reading of the Input / Output condition
At least 1 input active ?
No Change the UT148 module
Yes
Check the input wiring
Voltage on at least 1 input ?
Yes
No
Change the SRxxx module for the active input
D0155FRc
FIGURE 20 COMMUNICATION ALARMS DIGITAL VERSION TX COMMAND TIME NOTE: Before performing the diagnostic, use the HMI to reset the local equipment, then read the alarms again.
Alarms on communication DIP Analog
Communication alarms (analog version)
Maintenance
B.D /T
Lien
SYNC AL. STATUT BAT.
Maint
Verr
B.L
No guard or low level alarm
See figure 22
External alarm
See figure 23
SUPPLY 1
SUPPLY 2
Major/minor alarm programmable by HMI
Tx command time alarm
See figure 24
SUPPLY 1
SUPPLY 2
Major/minor alarm programmable by HMI
Noise alarm (DT)
See figure 22
SUPPLY 2
Minor alarm
MINOR ALARM
Locking alarm (DT)
See figure 22
SUPPLY 2
Minor alarm
MINOR ALARM
D0156FRd
FIGURE 21 COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG VERSION
No guard or low level alarm
Noise alarm (DT)
Locking alarm (DT)
Check that the configuration of both link units is compliant, as the link
Number of commands OK ?
No
Yes
Number of boards OK ? Yes Fault on IR183 or UT148
No
Change the configuration Change the IR183 module
Fault cleared ?
Yes
No Change the UT148 module
End
End
D0157FRc
FIGURE 22 COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG VERSION NO GUARD / LOW LEVEL / NOISE - BLOCKING
External alarm
Check the EN (A/B) input on the line communication port
Fault cleared ?
Yes
END
No
Change the IR183 module
Fault cleared ?
Yes
END
No

D0158 FRa
FIGURE 23 COMMUNICATION ALARMS ANALOG VERSION EXTERNAL ALARM
Maintenance e-terragridcom DIP 5.4 Warning and error messages
These messages are displayed to notify the user in case of error and risk of untimely commands, or supply instructions allowing to resolve a fault.
Miscellaneous messages or warnings
Teleprotection not ready (local or remote)
The DIP is processing a higher priority even (e.g. command restitution)
Checksum error
An error occurred during communication over the V24 link Repeat the operation.
Too many transmission errors
Fault in the V24 dialogue box. Restart the HMI or reset teleprotection manually.
PC disconnected
The PC < - - > Teleprotection connecting conductor has been disconnected or damaged.
Transmission timeout
The unit has not responded within the time set. Establish a new connection.
Database checksum fault
An error occurred during data transfer. Repeat the operation.
Contd D0159 FRa
FIGURE 24 MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES
Miscellaneous messages or warnings (contd)
The command will be transmitted online.
The action started may generate an untimely command on the remote unit.
OR
Switch the local unit to the Line lockingmode
Switch the remote unit in the Relay locking mode
Disconnect the remote unit output connectors.
The local commands are activated.
The action started may generate an untimely command on the local unit.
OR
Switch the local unit to the Relay locking mode
Disconnect the output connectors from the local unit.
The local commands are activated
Risk associated to remote unit loopback
END
D0160 FRa
FIGURE 25 MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES (CONTD)
6.
CLASSIFICATION OF FAULTS
Faults are distributed into two classes: major and minor Major faults A major fault is a fault whose appearance inhibits the normal operation of the equipment or causes a risk for operation. In all cases, it results in the command restitution relays being set to idle. The relays are held in this status until the fault disappears. Minor faults A minor fault is a fault whose appearance does not cause risks for operation. In this case, normal operation of the equipment is ensured. Faults are distributed into two types: reversible and irreversible Reversible faults Reversible faults indicate an abnormal operating condition at a given time. Teleprotection returns to a normal operating mode once the fault disappears. Irreversible faults Irreversible faults indicate permanent non operation of the link or equipment. Manual intervention (including powering back on or resetting) is required. Faults are distributed into 3 categories: power on / hardware / communication
The following table summarizes the faults classified per category with information related to the class and type of fault: FAULTS Power on faults Time stamp RAM test DSP RAM test Flash EPROM test Communication interface present Loopback test Configuration checksum SRxxx coherence test IRIG-B coherence test IR183 coherence test Hardware faults Presence of SRxxx modules AL1XX fault Presence of operating terminal blocks Battery fault (time stamp) I/O test UT power supply voltage test Link test Communication faults Transmission time alarm No signal received No Rx pace No Tx pace Loss of synchronization Bit error rate / MAJ ALARM Bit error rate / MIN ALARM Remote major alarm Remote minor alarm Extended Tx command alarm No guard Low level Blocking Noise External alarm * configuration with HMI MIN/MAJ* MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MIN MAJ MIN MIN/MAJ* MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MIN/MAJ* REV REV REV REV REV REV REV REV REV REV REV REV REV REV REV A A Dual tone*** Dual tone A D D D D D D D D D MAJ MIN MIN MIN MAJ MAJ MAJ REV REV REV IRREV IRREV REV IRREV A MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ IRREV IRREV IRREV IRREV IRREV IRREV IRREV IRREV IRREV A CLASS TYPE VERSION**
** In the Version column, the letter D indicates that the fault concerns only the digital version of the DIP. The letter A indicates the fault concerns only the analog version. The lack of letter in this column means that the fault concerns both versions. Faults of the remote equipment are reported locally. They are considered as reversible regardless of their nature. Resolving the remote fault results in the local alarm disappearing.
7.
UPDATE OF THE DIP FIRMWARE

Software updates always come with a risk. In case of blocking, the UT148 board must be returned to the factory to reset the memories.
7.1
Overview The update procedure includes four steps: Prior conditions. Installing files on the PC. Transferring update files.
During this step, the files are written in flash memory UT148 (a file is copied in 30 seconds). 7.2 Connecting the DIP.
Prior conditions During the update procedure, the equipment must be disconnected to prevent any untimely command. Before applying the update procedure: Power off the DIP unit. Disconnect the I/O connectors P11 to P13. Disconnect connector P18 providing access to the transmission line. Disconnect the optical connector of the IR 182 module if connected. Power on the DIP unit.
7.3
Installing files on the PC The update is supplied on a compressed file containing 2 files: Diptsoft.dat and Lisezmoi.txt. Create a temporary directory on the PC HD (e.g. C:\diptemp). Copy the update zip file into the directory created. Use Winzip to extract the dipsoft.dat and lisezmoi.txt files into the directory created. Open the lisezmoi.txt file using a text editor.
DIP/EN MT/A23 Page 38/40 Copy the update password for later use:
Copy the dipsoft.dat file into the installation directory of the HMI application on the PC (by default: C:\ Program Files \ ALSTOM \ IHM DIP\). If another dipsoft.dat file is already present, a message asks whether you wish to replace it, answer YES.
7.4
Transferring update files Once the update procedure launched, do not interrupt it by resetting, nor powering off the DIP nor disconnecting the serial link. If this rule is not applied, the unit may be damaged, requiring a return to the factory. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check the step on prior conditions (disconnect the DIP). Power on the DIP unit. Connect the RS 232 serial communication cable between the PC and the DIP. Start the HMI application. Connect the HMI from the DIP Tools \ connect:
6. 7.
Select the menu Tools \ Password. Enter the 15-character password copied in the lisezmoi.txt file (the password can be copied/pasted from this file):
8.
Click the
button. The following window opens:
This window indicates the current DSP and EPLD version, as well as the versions to download. 9. 10. Click the button.
Notification messages appear with information on the file transfer:
When all files have been transferred successfully, the DIP is reset. 11. 12. 13. Reset the list of events and alarms upon the update from the previous digital version to the ZZ339A-05 version or the analog version ZZ350A-03. Check that the DIP version complies with the update version by selecting the menu Read\local\version. Remove the C:\ diptemp directory, then the dipsoft.dat file from the HMI directory. Note: In case of communication problem between the PC HMI and the DIP, a message indicating a transmission problem and a prompt to restart the procedure may appear: Continue the update file transfer procedure from step 4.
DIP/EN MT/A23 Page 40/40 14.
At the end of the procedure, the DIP unit resets automatically, and the following message may be displayed. Ignore it.
7.5
Connecting the DIP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Power off the DIP unit. Connect the connectors. Power on the DIP unit. Reset the lists of events, alarms and counters. Log onto the DIP with the HMI matching the new version.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN HI/A23
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

PART 1: DIP - ANALOG SINGLE TONE
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 1/68
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2.
2.1 2.2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

Information presentation Example in a paragraph
7 8
8 8
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3
OVERVIEW
Foreword System Required Installing the HMI
9
9 9 9
4.
4.1 4.2
USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS

User level structure Menus
10
10 11
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6
DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT

Rules for Password Creation Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> Exiting the Password Manager
12
12 12 13 14 14 14
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
Main screen Header bar Menu bar Toolbar Status bars Work and dialog zone
15
15 15 16 16 16 17
7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5
FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION
<Tools> Menu <File> Menu <DIP> Menu <History> Menu <Test> Menu
18
18 18 19 19 19
8.
8.1 8.2 8.3
OPERATING THE HMI DIP SINGLE TONE

Launching the HMI Logging into the DIP <Tools> Menu
20
20 20 21
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 2/68 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.4 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5 8.6.6 8.6.7 8.6.8 8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4 8.7.5 8.7.6 8.8 8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3 8.8.4 8.8.5 8.8.6 8.8.7 8.9 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4 8.10 Entering a password Returning to level 0 Disconnecting the HMI Exit the HMI. <File> Menu Creating a configuration File>New> Description of the configuration window Configuration window toolbar Configuring General Parameters Configuring the number of commands Configuring the version Configuring IRIG-B Configuring HMI speed Configuring Logical Address Entering comments Configuring the link test
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 33 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 42
Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment Configuring Sender Parameters Configuring the Guard source Configuring the sender band used Configuring sender transmission levels Configuring Command transmission parameters Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment Configuring Receiver Parameters Configuring LF band Configuring Receiver Input Level Configuring Receiver Protection Scheme Configuring the status of the output relay upon the alarm Receiver holding delay configuration Configuring unblocking parameters Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration Configuring Input/output Parameters Configuring the I/O board Configuring Input Filter Delay Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Sending Input/Output Configuration Configuring alarm parameters
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.10.1 8.10.2 8.10.3 8.10.4 8.10.5 8.11 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.12 8.12.1 8.12.2 8.12.3 8.12.4 8.12.5 8.13 8.13.1 8.13.2 8.13.3 8.13.4 8.13.5 8.13.6 8.14 8.15 8.16 8.16.1 8.16.2 8.16.3 8.16.4 8.16.5 8.17 8.18 8.19 Configuring Alarm on External Input Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm Configuring the Alarm outputs delay parameter Sending the alarms configuration <Configuration> File Menu Editing a configuration file Saving a configuration file Sending a configuration file Closing a configuration file <DIP> Menu Reading the configuration Reading the hardware configuration Reading the versions Instant alarm reading Read input / output statuses DIP>Maintenance menu Switching from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode and vice-versa Maintenance status bar Reading the input levels measurement Configuring the output levels setting Configuring the reception level Maintenance - Forcing Date setup Resetting the DIP <History> Menu Events reading Alarms reading Reading the local command counters Deleting events Deleting alarms <Test> Menu <Factory> Menu <Help> Menu
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 3/68 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 46 46 47 48 48 49 49 50 51 52 52 53 53 55 60 61 61 62 63 64 64 65 66 66 66
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION FIGURE 3 MENU BAR FIGURE 4 TOOLBAR FIGURE 5 STATUS BAR FIGURE 6 EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY FIGURE 7 TOOLS MENU FIGURE 8 MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW FIGURE 9 TOOLBAR FIGURE 10 CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW FIGURE 11 CONFIGURATION GENERAL TAB PAGE FIGURE 12 CONFIGURATION SENDER TAB PAGE FIGURE 13 CONFIGURATION RECEIVER TAB PAGE FIGURE 14 CONFIGURATION - INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE FIGURE 15 CONFIGURATION ALARMS TAB PAGE FIGURE 16 CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU FIGURE 17 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW FIGURE 18 VERSION WINDOW FIGURE 19 INSTANT ALARMS WINDOW FIGURE 20 INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW FIGURE 21 MAINTENANCE LEVELS FIGURE 22 MAINTENANCE MENU FIGURE 23 MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR FIGURE 24 MAINTENANCE - FORCING FIGURE 25 EXAMPLE OF READ EVENTS LIST FIGURE 26 EXAMPLE OF READ ALARMS LIST FIGURE 27 EXAMPLE OF READ OF COUNTER STATUS 15 16 16 16 17 21 24 25 25 26 29 35 39 42 45 48 48 49 49 51 51 52 55 62 63 64
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION A B C D DATE 04/01/2001 23/08/2004 12/07/2006 14/11/2007 COMMENTS Original issue ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version New features and additional technical explanations New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, single tone analog and double tone analog. Minor corrections Minor corrections Minor corrections New version 2.3
E A22 B22 A23
11/02/2008 20/02/2009 01/06/2010 13/01/2011
GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP, i.e. the software application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.
DEFINITIONS
HMI Configuration Configuration File Input password User level Level password Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface). All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection. Micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a teleprotection. Password for accessing the Password Manager utility. All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator. Password for accessing a user level.
NOTE:
Windows and PC are registered trademarks.
1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(1)
(1)
2.
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

The firmware or software version numbers which may appear in illustrations in this manual may not reflect the latest implemented in the unit; the information is nonetheless current.
2.1
Information presentation Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1 >Menu_level_entry2>. Example: select File >New. In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu. In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>. A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.
2.2
Example in a paragraph <HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <> To clear events: Select History>Clear>Clear events
A <Confirmation> window opens:
Answer
3.
3.1
OVERVIEW
Foreword As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP Analog teleprotection HMI enables local: complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools, level adjustment without measuring apparatus, filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions), time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics), interactive and user-friendly maintenance, printing of unit parameters.
3.2
System Required The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum: 40 MB free space on the HD, 256 MB RAM.
IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI. When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter. Experience shows that USB converters offer lesser compatibility.
3.3
Installing the HMI Installation: Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive. Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:setup. Follow the instructions.
4.
4.1

User level structure The DIP places operations in hierarchical command: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator. The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2. Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 4.2 Menus
Level Menus File new open Tools Identification Returning to level 0 connect disconnect exit DIP * configuration hardware configuration version alarms snapshot input/output reset DIP / Date * read write DIP / Maintenance * input level measure output levels setting, adjustment receiving alignment and automatic alignment switch to maintenance mode unlocking line (security) unlocking relay (security) local loop back transmitter forcing commands output forcing alarms forcing Test * History * link test event list alarm list counter list clear event file clear alarm file Help TABLE 1 MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL * To access these menus, you need to be connected. x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x x x x x x 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
5.

The DIP Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, is used to create, modify, read and delete the passwords. To launch the application, click the desktop icon DIP Security icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it. For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.
5.1
Rules for Password Creation Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following: upper case (A to Z) lower case (a to z) numbers (0 to 9) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ { | } ~
5.2
Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and < List passwords >. To access the Password Manager menus: 1. Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management > window opens:
2. Select Password > Input, the < Password Input> window opens:
3. Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login). Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended upon the first use (see the next paragraph).
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 4. Click the button.
The following window opens:
The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available. 5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password. Upon first use, use the DIP password (upper case). We recommend to then modify this password. 1. Access the Manager menu (see 5.2) 2. Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:
3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see 5.1). Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled. 1. Click the button. The following window opens:
2. Confirm the new password by re-entering it.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 14/68 5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu Several passwords may be created. 1. To create user passwords, select < Create password >. The <Create password > window below opens:
2. Enter the new password in the < Input password > window, in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see 5.1). Enter the password again in the field Confirm password. 3. Click the button.
4. If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Enter password> window. 5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> in the Password Manager
The list of passwords is displayed. 1. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes. 5.6 Exiting the Password Manager To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit.
6.
The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes. As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this environment.
6.1
Main screen The main screen is composed of functional zones (see the following figures)
FIGURE 1 MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION
FIGURE 2 EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION 6.2 Header bar The header bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 16/68 6.3 Menu bar
The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).
FIGURE 3 MENU BAR 6.4 Toolbar The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.
FIGURE 4 TOOLBAR 6.5 Status bars Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information. The bottom bar displays: the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon) the link address the transmission speed of serial port (HMI connection) the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance) any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm) the user level granted (from 0 to 2 depending on the password) a green led indicating the connection status (OK when flashing) the DSP firmware version
FIGURE 5 STATUS BAR
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 6.6 Work and dialog zone
Most commands are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used: optional button groups tick boxes command buttons text boxes lists scroll bars
FIGURE 6 EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY
7.
7.1
<Tools> Menu
Identification: this menu is used to open a window to enter the password and access the corresponding user level. Access to the upper level is protected by password. Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege. Disconnect: this menu disconnects the HMI from the DIP. Exit: this menu closes the DIP HMI application. 7.2 <File> Menu
New: Creates a configuration file from a default configuration in a DIP version (Single tone or Dual tone). When selected a pop-up window opens asking you to choose DIP version (Single tone or Dual tone)
Open: Selecting this menu allows the following to be opened: Events files (*.events), Alarm files (*.alarms), Counters files (*.cnter), Config files: Configuration Files.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 7.3 <DIP> Menu
This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local unit: 7.4 Configuration: Read and modify all configuration parameters, Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters, Maintenance: Used to launch measures, adjust levels and for forcing. Alarms preview: provides a view of the current alarm status, Inputs / Outputs: read input and output status. Versions: read firmware versions. Date Setup: read and write the date and time on the unit. Reset: performs hardware and software resets on the unit.
<History> Menu
7.5
Events: read and display event list. Alarms: read and display alarms list. Counters: display the status of input/output commands counters. Counter Information can be saved and printed. Erase: via two sub menus <Erase Events> and <Erase Alarms>, allows event and alarm logs to be deleted from the unit.
<Test> Menu This menu enables you to perform a link test on the equipment.
8.
8.1
OPERATING THE HMI DIP SINGLE TONE

Launching the HMI To launch the HMI, click: Start>Programs>HMIDIP5K>HMIDIP5K> or by clicking the Desktop HMIDIP5K shortcut. Launching the DIP HMI allows to: log into a DIP create a configuration modify an existing configuration saved in the PC.
8.2
Logging into the DIP
To log in, click the Connect icon
or open the <Tools> menu:
and select <Local connect> to open the <Login> window.
You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.3 <Tools> Menu Once logged in, the <Tools> menu is used to: grant a level to a user according to a password, reset the user level to 0, disconnect the HMI from the DIP, exit the HMI.
FIGURE 7 TOOLS MENU 8.3.1 Entering a password When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0. To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user level and password management see 4. and 5. To enter a password: 1. Select Tools>Identification. The following window opens:
2. Enter the password. If the DIP has a password, only this password allows to raise the HMI to user level 2. 3. Check the level granted 8.3.2 Returning to level 0 The user may return to level 0 at any time. To set the user level to 0: 1. Select Tools>Return to level 0. 2. Check the user level in the bottom bar. (according to the password) in the status bar.
The DIP can, optionally, have an embedded password.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 22/68 If you are already a level 2 user, the menu is:
You can also change the embedded password by using this menu option. Please note that if you forget the embedded password, it may be reset only by returning the motherboard (UT148) to the plant. 8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI 1. Select Tools>Disconnect 2. The HMI is disconnected, the <DIP>, <History> menu disappears. The following icons in the upper bar are grayed out and inaccessible:
Information is no longer displayed in the bottom status bar (only 8.3.4 Exit the HMI. To exit the HMI: Select Tools>Exit. A confirmation messages appears.
is visible).
Answer The HMI closes.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.4 <File> Menu The <File> menu provides access to the configuration files.
This menu allows a new configuration to be created or a saved configuration file to be opened. 4 types of file can be opened: *.rtf -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see Figure 10 for the window display). *.alarms -> alarm list file for consultation (see figure 27 for the window display) *.events -> event list file for consultation (see figure 26 for the window display) *.cnter -> counter statement for consultation ( see figure 28 for the window display)
The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file: Select File>New or File>Open, Select the DIP Single Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New . Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration, Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations. The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration: 8.5 Select DIP>Configuration. Modify the displayed configuration. Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
Creating a configuration File>New> This menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration. This configuration can be modified, saved for later use (even at level 0), or sent to the unit (level2). 1. Selecting the File>New menu opens the <Version selection> asking for the DIP version.
2. Select Single tone in the scroll-down window and click OK.
Once the DIP version selected, a default configuration window opens.
FIGURE 8 MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW 8.5.1 Description of the configuration window The configuration parameters are divided in 5 tabs: General Sender Receiver Input/Output Alarms
This configuration window is used access to the following parameters: Number of commands Version (Normal / Enhanced) Comments HMI Speed Link test Logical address IRIG-B State Sender parameters Receiver parameters Input/Output parameters Alarms
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.5.2 Configuration window toolbar
FIGURE 9 TOOLBAR Clicking the button opens a Synthesis Window displaying the DIP Configuration parameters in text format:
FIGURE 10 CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW 8.6 Configuring General Parameters To configure the general parameters: Open the <Configuration> window (see 8.4).
FIGURE 11 CONFIGURATION GENERAL TAB PAGE 8.6.1 Configuring the number of commands
Select the value matching the configuration by checking the corresponding button. 8.6.2 Configuring the version
Select the version: Normal: power available for a signal command cannot be modified in this mode, as it depends on the number of commands. The total power available is distributed evenly among the number of commands. Enhanced: the power available for a signal command is adjusted automatically, according to the number of commands to be sent at a given time, and power authorized on the medium. Indeed, all the power available for an command is allocated according to variable conditions.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.6.3 Configuring IRIG-B
In case of IRIG-B module presence, check On. Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector. Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds). 8.6.4 Configuring HMI speed
Select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps value by checking the corresponding button. 8.6.5 Configuring Logical Address Range value 0 to 255. 8.6.6 Entering comments
Enter the Source Station, the Destination Station, and your comments in compliance with the following rules: Source and destination stations: 20 characters maximum. Comments: 70 characters maximum.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 28/68 8.6.7 Configuring the link test
The Link Test feature is used to automatically and periodically check the transmission medium between the sender and the receiver, by sending a message in a loop. To schedule transmission test: Select the test periodicity by checking the corresponding button: Daily: in this case enter the hour and minutes using the scroll-down window.
Hourly: in this case enter the minutes using the scroll-down window.
8.6.8
Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment When you have completed General Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
The DIP resets. Check the condition of the LEDs after reset. Please note that after each configuration transfer to the DIP, the user is returned to password level 0. a password is then required to return to level 2.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.7 Configuring Sender Parameters To configure the Sender parameters: Open the <Configuration> window (see 8.4). Click the Sender Tab. The following window opens:
FIGURE 12 CONFIGURATION SENDER TAB PAGE 8.7.1 Configuring the Guard source
Select the Guard source: Internal: the source is the DIP equipment. External: the source comes from an external unit (PLC or other). Note: The Useful LF Band Guard parameter depends on the Guard Source parameter. Therefore, the Guard Source parameter must be configured first.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 30/68 8.7.2 Configuring the sender band used
The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity. Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window. Possible values are: 300 - 2000 300 - 2400 300 - 3400
Select the Guard parameter in the appropriate scrolling menu. The Guard parameter depends on the <Bandwidth> parameter: 8.7.3 3680 for the 300-3400 bandwidth 2600 for the 300-2400 bandwidth 2400 or 3680 for the 300-2000 bandwidth
Configuring sender transmission levels
The Transmission level corresponds to the signal power allocated to a Frequency and to the Guard. The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm. To configure Transmission levels For Guard and Frequency 1 to 4: Select, using the scrolling button, the Transmission level in compliance with the following rule: The difference between sending frequency transmission levels must not exceed 16 dBm. If this rule is not applied, a warning message appears when attempting to save the configuration file.
If this warning message appears, modify the transmission levels in consequence.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.7.4 Configuring Command transmission parameters
The transmission of an input command requires the following parameters to be configured: 8.7.4.1 Holding Delay Mode pulsed or not Input Holding delay validation Protection scheme
Receiver holding delay configuration
Holding delay Parameter description The Holding Delay parameter corresponds to the minimum transmission time of a validated command. However, if the corresponding pulsed mode box is checked, this time is a maximum, as shown above. The transmission time is the maximum value between the Holding Delay and the input signal command duration. Example: Holding delay: 100 ms. A first input signal command duration is 5ms. Holding delay 100 ms > Command duration 5 ms: The command will be transmitted during 100 ms. A second input command duration is 120 ms. Input signal command duration 120 ms > Holding delay 100 ms: The command will be transmitted during 120 ms. Parameter Values Parameter values are in ms. Range value 0 to 500 ms. Procedure For each command, select the Holding Delay by positioning the scrolling button.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 32/68 8.7.4.2 Configuring Sender Input Valid delay
Input Valid Delay Parameter description At the receipt end the restitution of a command requires a processing time that varies according to the chosen protection scheme. To be rebuilt an input command must be transmitted during a time at least equal to the processing time. The Input Holding Valid Delay corresponds to a threshold applied to an input signal command duration conditioning the activation of the Input Holding Delay. Input signal commands whose duration is inferior to the Input Holding Valid Delay are validated and transmitted without any prolongation. Restitution at the receipt end of input commands sent in such condition is not guaranteed because the transmission time may be less than the processing time required by the Protection Scheme. Input signal commands whose duration is greater than the Holding Valid Delay, are validated and transmitted for a minimum duration corresponding to the Holding Delay parameter. When the Holding Delay parameter is greater than the processing reception duration, reception of input command sent in such condition is guaranteed to be lossless. Parameter Values Parameter values are in ms. Range value 0 to 5 ms. Example E.g. holding delay 50ms, input validation delay 5ms: 1. Input signal command 3ms, duration less than the Holding Delay: the Holding delay is not considered, the command is sent without prolongation. 2. Input command 6ms, command acquisition duration less than the Holding Delay validation. The Holding delay is taken into account and the command is transmitted for the Holding Delay: 50 ms. 3. Input command 60 ms: command acquisition duration more than the Holding Delay validation parameter. Input command more than the Holding Delay. The command is transmitted during 60 ms. Procedure For each command, select the Holding Delay validation by positioning the scrolling button.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.7.4.2.1 Configuring Sender Protection Schemes
Parameter Description 3 protection schemes are available: stage acceleration, locking and direct trigger. Permissive tripping commands are always monitored by a protection relay. The circuit breaker is tripped when receipt of the command coincides with operation of the protection relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault. The intention of these schemes is to speed up tripping for faults occurring within the protected zone. Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that detects faults external to the protected zone. Detection of an external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, receipt of the blocking signal prevents the remote end protection operating if it had detected the external fault. The risk of a spurious trip is higher. Direct tripping: remote triggering signals sent directly to the main trigger relay. Reception of the command triggers trips the circuit breaker. The method of communication must be reliable and secure because any signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at that end. Procedure For each command select the protection scheme by selecting the value with the scroll down window. 8.7.5 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure Depending on user needs and of the characteristics of input signals applied to the DIP, notably their duration, two procedures are available. 8.7.5.1 Procedure without Input Valid Delay For each command 1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme. Option: 2. Using the scroll-down window select a Holding Delay. 3. Click the button.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 34/68 8.7.5.2 Procedure without Input Valid Delay For each command
1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme. 2. Select the valid input delay by positioning the scrolling button.
3. Click the Note:
button. The Holding Delay parameter is automatically set to a minimum value compatible with the application scheme.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it. Holding delay, Holding delay validation, and protection schemes parameters are dependent. If the procedure indicated is not applied (e.g. Holding time selected before the protection schemes), incompatibilities may occur. In case of incompatibility when selecting the protection schemes, warning messages are displayed. More particularly, if the holding time is incompatible, a warning message is displayed: In this case, the minimum value for holding time is adjusted automatically to a value compatible with the protection scheme. 8.7.6 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment When you have completed Sender Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
The DIP resets. Check the condition of the LEDs after reset.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.8 Configuring Receiver Parameters To configure the Receiver parameters: Open the <Configuration> window (see 8.4). Click the Receiver Tab. The following window opens:
FIGURE 13 CONFIGURATION RECEIVER TAB PAGE 8.8.1 Configuring LF band
The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity. Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window. Possible values are: 300-2000,
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 36/68 300-2400, 300-3400.
The Guard parameter depends on the bandwidth. It is defined automatically according to the Bandwidth parameter: 8.8.2 2100-2300 for the frequency 300-2000, 2400-2600 for the frequency 2400-2660, 3500-3800 for the frequency 300-3400.
Configuring Receiver Input Level
Guard Signal This parameter defines the Guard Signal level. Parameter values are in dBm. Value Range -40 to 0 dBm. Select the Guard Signal input level using the scrolling button. Commands vs Guard gain This parameter corresponds to the relative level between signal commands level and Guard Signal. Parameter values are in dB. Two ranges of values are possible according to the version selected: Normal or Enhanced. 0 - 6 dB for the normal version, 0 - 16 dB for the enhanced version. Select Commands vs Guard Gain using the scrolling button. Note: The Receiver Input level can also be set from the Maintenance window, manually or automatically (see 8.12). 8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Scheme
Parameter Description Three protection values are possible: stage acceleration, locking and direct trigger. For each command, select the Type using the scrolling window.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.8.4 Configuring the status of the output relay upon the alarm
Parameter Description Idle: the restitution relay is set to the idle state in case of alarm. Former state: the restitution relay contact remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch. For each command Select the Relay state on alarm parameter using the scrolling window. 8.8.5 Receiver holding delay configuration
Range value 0 to 500 ms by 1 ms steps. For each command Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 38/68 8.8.6 Configuring unblocking parameters
Unblocking Only command which type is Permissive tripping can be unblocked. Each command can be unblocked, independently of the others. For each command to unblock: Check the appropriate box. Unblocking threshold Parameter values are in dB. The value range is -20 to -10 dB. Display accuracy is 0.1dB. Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button. Unblocking Delay Parameter values are in ms. Range value 5 to 80 ms. Display accuracy is 0.1 ms. Select the unblocking delay value using the scrolling button. 8.8.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration When you have completed Receiver Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.
Click the
The DIP resets. Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.9 Configuring Input/output Parameters To configure Input/Output parameters: Open the <Configuration> window (see 8.4). Click the Input / Output tab. The following window opens:
FIGURE 14 CONFIGURATION - INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE 8.9.1 Configuring the I/O board
Select the I/O Boards parameter corresponding to your hardware configuration by checking the corresponding box. For 2 commands select 1 board. For more than 2 commands, 1 or two boards can be selected. Note: If two boards are selected, a Combinatorial Logic on Inputs part is displayed.
8.9.2
Configuring Input Filter Delay
Parameter Description The Input Filter Delay parameter is a threshold applied to the input command signal. It is used to exclude high noise-level signals which could be taken as input commands. Signal commands with a duration less than the Input Filter Delay duration are not transmitted. Signal commands with a duration greater than the Input Filter Delay duration are validated and transmitted. The propagation time of the command transmitted via the Input Filter Delay increases of the Input Filter Delay. Parameter value Range 0 to 3 ms in 1 ms steps. Procedure For each command to which an input filter delay is to be applied: Select the value using the scrolling button. 8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs This panel is only available having configured 4 commands/2 boards.
It is used to allocate commands with logical associations between input signals.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP For each command the possible choices are:
IN1: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the INT2 input (P10 connector) IN2: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the IN2 input (P10 connector) IN1 or IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the OR operator applied to the input signal connected on the IN1 input (P10 connector) and the IN2 input (P10 connector) IN1 and IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the AND operator applied to the input signal connected to the IN1 input (P10 connector) and the IN2 input (P10 connector)
For command 2 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN3 and IN2 by IN4. For command 3 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN5, IN2 by IN6 and P10 connector by P12 connector. For command 4 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN7, IN2 by IN8 and P10 connector by P12 connector. 8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration When you have completed Input/Output Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
Click the
The DIP resets. Check the status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 42/68 8.10 Configuring alarm parameters To configure alarm parameters: Open the <Configuration> window (see 8.4). Click the Alarms tab.
FIGURE 15 CONFIGURATION ALARMS TAB PAGE 8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input
The External alarm input comes from an external unit (PLC or other).
The external unit and the DIP must be interconnected with a special connection cable supporting alarm wires. Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0 to 2.5 s. The display accuracy is 0.1s. To configure Alarm on External Input: 1. Check the Alarm on external input box, 2. Check the button for level Minor or Major button. 8.10.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm This alarm is set if the input command signal duration is more than the parameter value. Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0.5 to 10 s. The display accuracy is 0.1s. To configure Input Command Duration Alarm: 1. Check the Input Command Duration Alarm box, 2. Select the value using the scrolling button. 3. Select the alarm level, Minor or Major. 8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm
This alarm occurs if the Signal level, measured through internal digital filter, is under a Threshold during a Delay. Threshold Defines the level under which an alarm is triggered. Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -16 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is 0.1 dBr. Delay Defines the low level signal delay from which an alarm is triggered. Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is 0.1s. To configure the Signal Loss Alarm parameters: 1. Select the threshold level using the scrolling button. 2. Select the delay using the scrolling button.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 44/68 8.10.4 Configuring the Alarm outputs delay parameter
Alarm outputs delay: Closing of the contact relay can be delayed. Possible values are: 0 2.5 s 5s 10 s For each relay 1 and 2, a major alarm and a minor alarm are possible: Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button. 8.10.5 Sending the alarms configuration When you have completed the Alarms parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
Click the
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.11 <Configuration> File Menu
FIGURE 16 CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU This menu allows configuration files to be edited, saved, sent and closed. 8.11.1 Editing a configuration file The Edit menu is used to display a synthesis Parameter values window. To edit a configuration file in the <Configuration> window: Select File > Edit. Click the button. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 46/68 8.11.2 Saving a configuration file
Save: this menu opens a standard Windowsdialog box allowing the displayed configuration to be saved in a file. To save a configuration file: Select File>Save. Give a path for the saved file and name it. 8.11.3 Sending a configuration file Send: This menu, accessible from user level 2, is used to send the HMI displayed configuration to the unit. After receiving the configuration file, the unit resets. When the unit restarts, the sent configuration is taken into account. A configuration window is opened in the HMI using the menus File > New > or File > Open > or DIP > Configuration >. Once modified, the configuration file can be sent to the unit using the menu File >Send or the Send button. To send a configuration file:
Select File > Send or click the The following window opens:
button.
The DIP resets. Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms. 8.11.4 Closing a configuration file Exit: This menu closes the configuration window. To close a configuration window select File > Exit Select File>Exit. 8.12 <DIP> Menu
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP The <DIP> menu allows to display: Configuration Hardware configuration Maintenance Alarms snapshot Input/Output Versions Date Setup
The DIP menu also allows to launch the Reset command (user level 2). 8.12.1 Reading the configuration To read the configuration parameters: Select DIP>Configuration. A <Configuration> window opens:
When opening the <Configuration> window, the user can modify the configuration parameters (see 8.5 and next).
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 48/68 8.12.2 Reading the hardware configuration To read the hardware configuration: Select DIP>Hardware Config. The <Hardware> window opens:
FIGURE 17 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW This window shows the hardware configuration. The units installed are accessible and the appropriate box checked. Units not installed are grayed out and not legible. 8.12.3 Reading the versions This menu allows to read the version of the EPLD and DSP firmware. To read the version: Select DIP>Versions. The following window opens:
FIGURE 18 VERSION WINDOW
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.12.4 Instant alarm reading To read the alarms statuses in Instant alarms: Select DIP> Alarms Snapshot.
FIGURE 19 INSTANT ALARMS WINDOW 8.12.5 Read input / output statuses To read input / output statuses: Select DIP>Input / Output. The following Input / Output Statuses window opens:
FIGURE 20 INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW
The Input / Output Statuses parameter represents the status of commands acquired and rendered. Two statuses are possible: Active and Inactive. Inactive command = Inputs in black and Outputs in blue Active command = Inputs and Outputs in red
Example of active command:
A signal command is active on IN1, the matching input is red. The signal is transmitted, Tx C1 in red, The status of the R1 command restitution is active and red. 8.13 DIP>Maintenance menu The DIP>Maintenance menu allows performing the following operations: Switch to maintenance or normal mode Unlockingline or relay Local loopback Forcing transmission, reception or an alarm Reset events or alarms (local)
To access the Maintenance menus: Select DIP>Maintenance, the following window opens:
FIGURE 21 MAINTENANCE LEVELS Only reading of the input level is accessible when accessing level 0 of the Maintenance menu. In this case, only the Level tab page is accessible. Access to the user 2 level allows manual or automatic setting of the output level parameters. An additional Forcing tab page provides access to the forcing and loopback functions. At first, the user is in the normal mode ; a level 2 user can switch to the maintenance mode and vice-versa via the mode menu 8.13.1 Switching from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode and vice-versa
FIGURE 22 MAINTENANCE MENU To switch from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode: Select Mode>Normal mode. Only the Levels tab page is available. To switch from the Normal mode to the Maintenance mode: Select Mode>Maintenance. In the Maintenance mode, the <Force/lock/Loop> tab page is available.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 52/68 8.13.2 Maintenance status bar The Maintenance status bar displays the following elements: Line status (locked / unlocked) Relay status (locked / unlocked) Loopback status on / off.
FIGURE 23 MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR 8.13.3 Reading the input levels measurement
This screen, accessible from the user level 0, allows reading the input levels in the graphic form. The digital values are also displayed in the upper part of the screen. The value range is -45 to 15 dBr, nominal value for receiver alignment being 0 dBr. The display accuracy is 0.1 dBr. Click the button to display the values to be refreshed.
Click the Automatic refresh button to display the values to be refreshed regularly.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.13.4 Configuring the output levels setting
This screen, accessible from the user level 2, allows defining the DIP frequencies, as well as the guard output levels. The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm. Procedure For the guard frequency and command frequency 1 to 4: Select the output level using the scrolling button. Once the operation has been completed, click the 8.13.5 8.13.5.1 Configuring the reception level Manually button.
This screen, accessible on level 2, allows to adjust the level of reception. Guard frequency The level of reception of guard frequencies is expressed directly in dBm. This level can be set between -45 dBm and +15 dBm. Display accuracy is 0.1dBm. Command / Guard relative level The Commands / Guard relative level is expressed in dB. This level is adjustable between 0 and +6dB in the normal mode and between 0 and +16dB in the enhanced mode. Settings are made while considering the level of output and attenuation of the medium.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 54/68 Display accuracy is 0.1dBm.
Settings of the Guard and Commands / Guard relative level parameters are independent, and must be sent separately. Procedure Select the Guard level of reception using the scrolling button. Click the button.
Select the Commands / Guard relative level parameter using the scrolling button. Click the button.
To save the settings after a reset, refer to 8.12.5.3.
8.13.5.2
Align automatically The button is accessible on the user 2 level.
This command launches receiver alignment. This alignment is automatic and performed according to the reception level of the guard frequency. At the end of the alignment, the reception level of the guard frequency changes. To launch automatic alignment: Click the button.
The following window opens, indicating that automatic alignment has started:
Once the alignment is complete, the following message is displayed:
Click the
button.
To save the settings after a reset, refer to the next paragraph. 8.13.5.3 Saving the settings for output level and reception level The settings of the output level and reception level (manual or automatic) are lost after a reset. Once the settings are complete, close the Maintenance window to maintain them: A pop-up window opens:
Answer. A message appears, notifying that the DIP has been reset. The settings are stored in flash memory, and remain active after the reset. 8.13.6 Maintenance - Forcing This tab page is accessible on the user 2 level and in the Maintenance mode. To access the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback window, open the Maintenance window (see 8.12) and select the Force / Lock / Loop tab.
FIGURE 24 MAINTENANCE - FORCING
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 56/68 8.13.6.1 Configuring the Unlocking / Loopback parameters
Loop In this mode, the transmission is looped back to reception even if access to the sending medium is blocked. Procedure To activate / deactivate loopback: select Active / Inactive by clicking the appropriate button.
Unlock The AF line and contact statuses are: Unlocked Locked
Unlock AF line: this status is used to connect the teleprotection transmitter to the transmission line. This operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command transmission, as the operator can simulate the acquisition of a command. Lock AF line: this status is used to disconnect the teleprotection transmitter from the transmission line. The operator can then simulate safely a command acquisition. Contact Relay unlocking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays complies with the command conditions present in the reception line. This operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command transmission, in case of loopback. Contact Relay locking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays are forced to the idle status, regardless of the command conditions present in the reception line. Procedure To unblock a AF line: Check the AF Line box. To block a AF line: Uncheck the AF Line box. To unblock a relay: Check the Relay box. To block a relay: Uncheck the Relay box. When the Loopback and Locking parameters are configured: Click the button.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP Check the condition for updating the settings in the bottom bar:
8.13.6.1.1 Forcing the transmitter
The HMI does not operate as a simulator. More particularly, forcing triggers actual command transmissions and rendering. Therefore, untimely use of these commands may have a severe impact on the operation.
This screen is used to send frequencies corresponding to different statuses over unlocked lines: standby, command or test message. To use this feature, the copy relays must be unlocked at all times. To force a frequency: Check the appropriate box. Click the button.
The forced frequency becomes red: To interrupt forcing, click the 8.13.6.1.2 Forcing output relays button.
This screen is used to force the status of command rendering relays on the local unit. The command output relays will be activated only if the relays are unlocked. The copy relays must be unlocked at all times. To force an output relay: Check the appropriate box. Click the button.
The forced command becomes red: To interrupt forcing, click the 8.13.6.2 Forcing PLC commands button.
Forcing Transmission Reception When commands are sent to received via the PLC, transmission / reception of the other signals can be blocked to ensure all power is available for these orders. Transmission and reception signals are sent with the commands to activate the blocking feature. Forcing PLC commands allows activating the transmission / reception blocking feature, to check its operational status. To check PLC Emission blocking: Check the Active box under Transmission. Click the button.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP Transmission is displayed in red:
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 3-10 of connector P18 is closed. To interrupt forcing, click the To check PLC Reception blocking: Check the Active box under Reception. Click the button. button.
Reception is displayed in red: Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminal 5 of connector P18 is closed. To interrupt forcing, click the Active Inactive forcing When a DIP becomes inactive, the relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 closes to inform the PLC. Inactive forcing allows simulating the inactive status of the DIP. button.
To force the inactive status of the DIP: Check the Inactive box It is displayed in red: Click the button.
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 5-12 of connector P18 is closed. IN command This part allows to check the presence of an external alarm between terminals 6-13 of connector P18. In case of an external alarm, Active is displayed in yellow: In case of lack of external alarm, Inactive is displayed in green: .
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 60/68 8.13.6.3 Alarms forcing
To force the alarms: Check the Minor or Major box, or both. Click the button.
The other parts of the window are grayed out and inaccessible. Check the alarm status LEDs. To interrupt forcing, click the 8.14 Date setup The DIP>Set date menu allows to read or define the date of the DIP. To set the date, select DIP>Date Setup. The following window opens: button.
Set the date in the PC Time / Date section of the window. Once the information related with the date have been entered, click the button to copy the settings in the DIP section.
Note: 8.15 Resetting the DIP
the date can also be displayed and set by clicking the the upper tool bar.
button in
To reset the DIP from the DIP menu: Select DIP>Reset. A confirmation message is then displayed, in a pop-up window:
Answer
The following window opens, indicating that resetting is in progress.
After restarting the DIP, check the status of LEDs and lack of alarms. 8.16 <History> Menu
There are two types of history: Non time-stamped (counters) Time-stamped by the internal clock (events / alarms)
The <History> menu allows to display the following information: Events log Alarms log Counters
The <History> also allows to clear events and alarms histories.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 62/68 WARNING: 8.16.1 Events reading To read events:
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP ONCE THE HISTORIES HAVE BEEN CLEARED, THE INFORMATION CAN NO LONGER BE RETRIEVED
Select History>Events. The following message is displayed when loading events:
The Event window opens.
FIGURE 25 EXAMPLE OF READ EVENTS LIST The File menu is used to save and print events files (*.event), but also exit the events file:
The Save The Refresh
and Print
buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.
button refreshes the events list.
The File menu in the main window allows opening the events files (*.event):
The events time-stamped by the internal clock in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new event replaces the older event saved.
Human Machine Interface SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.16.2 Alarms reading To read the alarms list:
Select History>Alarms. The following message is displayed when loading alarms:
The Alarms window opens.
FIGURE 26 EXAMPLE OF READ ALARMS LIST Alarms time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 alarms. Once the memory is full, any new alarm replaces the first alarm saved. The File menu is used to save and print alarms files (*.alarms), but also exit the alarms file:
The Save
and Print
The Refresh
button refreshes the alarms list.
The File menu in the main window allows opening the alarms files (*.alarms):
8.16.3
Reading the local command counters To read the local command counters: Select History>Counters. The following window opens:
FIGURE 27 EXAMPLE OF READ OF COUNTER STATUS The File menu is used to save and print counter files (*.cnter), but also exit the counter file:
The Save
and Print
buttons allow to save and print the counters respectively.
The File menu in the main window allows opening the counter files (*.cnter):
The memorization capacity of the counters is limited to 65535. 8.16.4 Deleting events The Erase the events option allows deleting all events displayed in the list. Note: This option fully deletes system events and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the events at a later date, use the File>Save
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 65/68 option to save a copy of the events list before using the Erase>Events option.
To delete the events list currently displayed. Select History>Erase >Erase events.
A confirmation window opens:
Answer
Check that the events file is empty by selecting History>Events. 8.16.5 Deleting alarms The Delete the alarms option allows deleting all alarms displayed in the list. Note: This option fully deletes system alarms and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the alarms at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the alarms list before using the Erase>Alarms option.
To delete the alarms list currently displayed: Select History>Erase>Erase the events.
The following pop-up window opens:
Answer
Check that the alarms file is empty by selecting History>Alarms. 8.17 <Test> Menu
The link test allows checking the ability of the DIP link to sent and receive commands in the bidirectional mode. The automatic launching of the link test can also be planned daily or hourly (see 8.5.7 for settings). Command processing overrides the link test. To launch the link test: Select Test>Link test. In case of bad results, a DIP fault is declared. 8.18 <Factory> Menu This menu offers a single choice
This menu disconnects the battery (the factory exit status). 8.19 <Help> Menu
This menu provides access to the help file and allows to read the software version of the HMI. Access to the help files To access the User Manual, select Help>User Manual. Reading the software version of the HMI O read the software version of the HMI: Select Help>About, the following window opens:
BLANK PAGE
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN HI/A23

PART 2: DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 10 11
11 11
2.1 Information presentation 2.2 Example in a paragraph
3.
OVERVIEW
12
12 12 12 12 13
3.1 Foreword 3.2 System Required 3.3 Installing the HMI 3.4 First use 3.5 Installing the documentation
4.
14
14 14
4.1 User level structure 4.2 Menus
5.
15
15 15 16 17 17 17
5.1 Rules for Password Creation 5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu 5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu 5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> 5.6 Exiting the Password Manager
6.
18
18 18 19 19 19 20
6.1 Main screen 6.2 Header bar 6.3 Menu bar 6.4 Toolbar 6.5 Status bars 6.6 Work and dialog zone
7.
21
21 21 22 22 22
7.1 <Tools> Menu 7.2 <File> Menu 7.3 <DIP> Menu 7.4 <History> Menu 7.5 <Test> Menu
8.
OPERATING THE HMI DIP DUAL TONE
23
23
8.1 Launching the HMI
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 2/74 8.2 Logging into the DIP 8.3 <Tools> Menu 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 Entering a password Returning to level 0 Disconnecting the HMI Exit the HMI.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 23 24 24 24 25 25 25 26 27 28 28 29 29 29 29 30 31 31 32 33 33 34 37 39 39 40 40 41 41 41 42 42 43 44 44 45 46 46
8.4 <File> Menu 8.5 General Configuration Procedure 8.6 Creating a configuration File> New 8.6.1 8.6.2 Description of the Configuration window Configuration window toolbar
8.7 Configuring General Parameters 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4 8.7.5 8.7.6 Configuring IRIG-B Configuring HMI speed Configuring Logical Address Configuring on Link test failure Limiting events Entering comments
8.8 Configuring Sender Parameters 8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3 8.8.4 8.8.5 Configuring LF band Configuring sender transmission levels Configuring Command transmission parameters Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment
8.9 Configuring Receiver Parameters 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4 8.9.5 8.9.6 8.9.7 Configuring LF band Configuring Receiver Input Level Configuring Receiver Protection Schemes Configuring the status of the restitution relays upon the alarm. Receiver holding delay configuration Configuring unblocking parameters Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration
8.10 Configuring Input/output Parameters 8.10.1 8.10.2 8.10.3 8.10.4 Configuring I/O Boards Configuring Input Filter Delay Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs Sending Input/Output Configuration
8.11 Configuring alarm parameters
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.11.1 8.11.2 8.11.3 8.11.4 8.11.5 8.11.6 8.11.7 8.11.8 Configuring the Alarm on external input parameter Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm Configuring Alarm on Signal loss. Configuring Noise Alarm Configuring on Link test failure Configuring the Locking alarm Configuring alarm output delay Sending the alarms configuration
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 3/74 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 51 52 52 52 53 53 54 55 55 56 57 58 58 59 59 60 61 61 62 63 63 64 64 65 66 66 67
8.12 File Configuration Menu 8.12.1 8.12.2 8.12.3 8.12.4 Editing a configuration file Saving a configuration file Sending a configuration file Closing a configuration file
8.13 <DIP> Menu 8.13.1 8.13.2 8.13.3 8.13.4 8.13.5 Reading the configuration Reading the hardware configuration Reading the versions Instant alarm reading Read input / output statuses
8.14 DIP Maintenance Menus 8.14.1 8.14.2 8.14.3 8.14.4 8.14.5 8.14.6 8.14.7 8.14.8 8.14.9 Switch to Maintenance / Normal mode Maintenance status bar Reading the input level measurement Configuring the output levels setting Configuring the reception level Align automatically Saving level settings. Configuring forcing and loopback Unlocking feature
8.14.10 Configuring input/output loopback 8.14.11 Forcing the transmitter 8.14.12 Forcing output relays 8.14.13 Forcing PLC commands 8.14.14 Alarms forcing 8.15 Date setup 8.16 Resetting the DIP 8.17 <History> Menu
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 4/74 8.17.1 8.17.2 8.17.3 8.17.4 8.17.5 Events reading Alarms reading Reading counters Deleting events Deleting alarms
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 67 69 70 71 72 73 73 73 73 74
8.18 <Test> Menu 8.19 <Factory> Menu 8.20 <Help> Menu 8.20.1 8.20.2 Access to the help files Reading the software version of the HMI
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION FIGURE 2 EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION FIGURE 3 MENU BAR FIGURE 4 TOOLBAR FIGURE 5 STATUS BAR FIGURE 6 EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY FIGURE 7 TOOLS MENU FIGURE 9 VERSION SELECTION WINDOW FIGURE 10 CONFIGURATION GENERAL TAB PAGE FIGURE 11 TOOLBAR FIGURE 12 CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW FIGURE 13 CONFIGURATION SENDER TAB PAGE FIGURE 14 CONFIGURATION RECEIVER TAB PAGE FIGURE 15 INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE FIGURE 16 I/O BOARDS FIGURE 17 INPUT FILTER DELAY FIGURE 18 COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS FIGURE 19 CONFIGURATION ALARMS TAB PAGE FIGURE 20 CONFIGURATION MENU FIGURE 21 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW FIGURE 22 INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW FIGURE 23 MAINTENANCE LEVELS FIGURE 24 MAINTENANCE FORCING 18 18 19 19 19 20 24 27 27 28 28 32 39 43 44 44 45 46 51 54 55 57 61
FIGURE 25 HISTORY MENU FIGURE 26 EVENT WINDOW DUAL TONE FIGURE 27 ALARMS WINDOW FIGURE 28 LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS WINDOW
67 68 69 70
BLANK PAGE
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION A B C11 D11 DATE 24/01/2001 23/08/2004 12/07/2006 14/11/2007 COMMENTS Original issue ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version New features and additional technical explanations New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, Dual Tone analog and dual tone analog Minor corrections Version 2.2 Minor corrections Version 2.3
E11 A22 B22 A23
11/02/2008 20/02/2009 01/06/2010 13/01/2011
BLANK PAGE
GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP, i.e. the software application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.
DEFINITIONS
HMI Configuration Configuration File Input password User level Level password Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface). All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection. Micro-computer file containing components of a teleprotection. all the configuration
Password for accessing the Password Manager utility. All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator. Password for accessing a user level.
NOTE:
1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRALOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
(1)
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1) SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRALOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1)
2.

2.1
Information presentation Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1 >Menu_level_entry2>. Example: select File >New. In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu. In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>. A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.
2.2
Example in a paragraph <HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <> To clear events: Select History>Erase >Erase events
A <Confirmation> window opens:
Answer
to delete
3.
3.1
OVERVIEW
Foreword As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP Analog teleprotection HMI enables local: complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools, level adjustment without measuring apparatus, filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions), time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics), interactive and user-friendly maintenance, printing of unit parameters.
3.2
System Required The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum: 40 MB free space on the HD, 256 MB RAM.
IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI. When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter rather than a USB converter. 3.3 Installing the HMI For safety purposes, we recommend installing the HMI from a copy of the disc supplied. Installation: 3.4 Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive. Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:set up. Follow the instructions.
First use The language of use of the HMI must be configured the first use. To launch the application, click the desktop icon DIP HMI icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it. The following window opens:
Click OK to open a scrolling menu to select the language.
Select the language required
Click OK, to open the following window
Restart the application. 3.5 Installing the documentation The user manuals may be accessible from the HMI. (refer to $7.7) Run the batch.exe file from the CD_ROM menu in the Documentation directory. Follow the instructions.
This procedure may also be used to update the documentation.
4.
4.1

User level structure The DIP places operations in hierarchical command: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator. The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2. Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.
4.2
Menus Level Menus

File new open Tools Identification Returning to level 0 connect disconnect exit DIP * configuration hardware configuration version alarms snapshot input/output reset DIP / Date * read write DIP / Maintenance * input level measure output levels setting, adjustment receiving alignment and automatic alignment switch to maintenance mode unlocking line (security) unlocking relay (security) local loop back transmitter forcing commands output forcing alarms forcing Test * History * link test event list alarm list counter list clear event file clear alarm file Help x x x x x x
0
x x x x x x x x x x x x
2
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
TABLE 1 MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL * To access these menus, you need to be connected.
5.

5.1
Rules for Password Creation Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. upper case (A to Z) lower case (a to z) numbers (0 to 9) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ { | } ~
5.2
Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and < List passwords >. To access the Password Manager menus: 1. Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management > window opens:
2. Select Password > Input, the < Password Input> window opens:
3. Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login). Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended upon the first use (see the next paragraph). button.
4. Click the
The following window opens:
The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available. 5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password. Upon first use, use the DIP password (upper case). We recommend to then modify this password. 1. Access the Manager menu (see 5.2) 2. Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:
3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see 5.1). Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled. 1. Click the button. The following window opens:
2. Confirm the new password by re-entering it.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu Several passwords may be created. 1. To create user passwords, select < Create password >. The <Create password > window below opens:
2. Enter the new password in the < Input password > window, in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see 5.1). Enter the password again in the field Confirm password. 3. Click the button.
4. If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Enter password> window. 5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> in the Password Manager
The list of passwords is displayed. 1. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes. 5.6 Exiting the Password Manager To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit.
6.
6.1
Main screen The main screen is composed of functional zones (see the following figures)
FIGURE 2 EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION 6.2 Header bar The header bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 6.3 Menu bar
The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).
FIGURE 4 TOOLBAR 6.5 Status bars Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information. The bottom bar displays: 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon) the link address the transmission speed of serial port (HMI connection) the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance) any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm) the user level granted (from 0 to 2 depending on the password) a green led indicating the connection status (OK when flashing) the DSP firmware version
FIGURE 5 STATUS BAR
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 20/74 6.6 Work and dialog zone
Most commands are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used: 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. optional button groups tick boxes command buttons text boxes lists scroll bars
7.
7.1
<Tools> Menu
Identification: this menu is used to open a window to enter the password and access the corresponding user level. Access to the upper level is protected by password. Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege. Disconnect: this menu disconnects the HMI from the DIP. Exit: this menu closes the DIP HMI application. 7.2 <File> Menu
New: Creates a configuration file from a default configuration in a DIP version (Dual Tone or Dual tone). When selected a pop-up window opens asking you to choose DIP version (Dual Tone or Dual tone)
Open: Selecting this menu allows the following to be opened: 19. 20. 21. 22. Events files (*.events), Alarm files (*.alarms), Counters files (*.cnter), Config files: Configuration Files.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 22/74 7.3 <DIP> Menu
This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local unit: 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 7.4 Configuration: Read and modify all configuration parameters, Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters, Maintenance: Used to launch measures, adjust levels and for forcing. Alarms preview: provides a view of the current alarm status, Inputs / Outputs: read input and output status. Versions: read firmware versions. Date Setup: read and write the date and time on the unit. Reset: performs hardware and software resets on the unit.
<History> Menu
31. 32. 33. 34. 7.5
Events: read and display event list. Alarms: read and display alarms list. Counters: display the status of input/output commands counters. Counter Information can be saved and printed. Erase: via two sub menus <Erase Events> and <Erase Alarms>, allows event and alarm logs to be deleted from the unit.
<Test> Menu This menu enables you to perform a link test on the equipment.
8.
8.1
OPERATING THE HMI DIP DUAL TONE

Launching the HMI To launch the HMI, click: Start>Programs>HMIDIP5K>HMIDIP5K> or by clicking the Desktop HMIDIP5K shortcut. Launching the DIP HMI allows to: log into a DIP create a configuration modify an existing configuration saved in the PC.
8.2
Logging into the DIP
To log in, click the Connect icon
or open the <Tools> menu:
and select <Local connect> to open the <Login> window.
You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 24/74 8.3 <Tools> Menu Once logged in, the <Tools> menu is used to: 35. 36. 37. 38. grant a level to a user according to a password, reset the user level to 0, disconnect the HMI from the DIP, exit the HMI.
FIGURE 7 TOOLS MENU 8.3.1 Entering a password When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0. To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user level and password management see 4. and 5. To enter a password: 1. Select Tools>Identification. The following window opens:
2. Enter the password. If the DIP has a password, only this password allows to raise the HMI to user level 2. 3. Check the level granted 8.3.2 Returning to level 0 The user may return to level 0 at any time. To set the user level to 0: 1. Select Tools>Return to level 0. 2. Check the user level in the bottom bar. (according to the password) in the status bar.
The DIP can, optionally, have an embedded password.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP If you are already a level 2 user, the menu is:
You can also change the embedded password by using this menu option. Please note that if you forget the embedded password, it may be reset only by returning the motherboard (UT148) to the plant. 8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI 1. Select Tools>Disconnect 2. The HMI is disconnected, the <DIP>, <History> menu disappears. The following icons in the upper bar are grayed out and inaccessible:
Information is no longer displayed in the bottom status bar (only 8.3.4 Exit the HMI. To exit the HMI: Select Tools>Exit. A confirmation messages appears.
is visible).
Answer The HMI closes.
8.4
<File> Menu The <File> menu provides access to the configuration files. This menu allows a new configuration to be created or a saved configuration file to be opened. 4 types of file can be opened:
*.rtf -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see Figure 9 configuration general tab page for the window display). *.alarms -> alarm list file for consultation (see Figure 18 configuration alarms tab page for the window display) *.events -> event list file for consultation *.counter -> counter statement for consultation The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file: Select File>New or File>Open, Select the DIP Dual Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New. Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration, Save the changed configuration (File>Save). Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations. The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration: Select DIP>Configuration. Modify the displayed configuration. Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
8.5
General Configuration Procedure The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file: Select File>New or File>Open. Select the DIP Dual Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New. Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration, Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations. The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration: Select DIP>Configuration. Modify the displayed configuration. Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.6 Creating a configuration File> New
This menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration. This configuration can be modified, saved for later use (even at level 0), or sent to the unit (level2). Selecting the File>New menu opens a pop up window asking for the DIP version. Select Dual tone in the scroll-down window. A warning message indicates the minimum version no. from which this type of configuration is accepted, click YES.
FIGURE 8 VERSION SELECTION WINDOW After Selecting Dual tone in the scroll-down window the <Configuration> window appears.
FIGURE 9 CONFIGURATION GENERAL TAB PAGE
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 28/74 8.6.1 Description of the Configuration window The configuration parameters are divided in 5 tabs: 8.6.2 General Sender Receiver Input/Output Alarms
Configuration window toolbar
FIGURE 10 TOOLBAR Clicking the button opens a Synthesis Window displaying the DIP Configuration parameters in text format:
FIGURE 11 CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.7 8.7.1 Configuring General Parameters Configuring IRIG-B
In case of IRIG-B module presence, check On. Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector. Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds). 8.7.2 Configuring HMI speed
It is the communication flow between the HMI and the DIP. Select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps value by checking the corresponding button. The HMI will attempt to connect at the speed defined, in case of bad link, it will attempt to connect at lower speeds. 8.7.3 Configuring Logical Address Range value 0 to 255.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 30/74 8.7.4 Configuring on Link test failure
The Link Test feature is used to automatically and periodically check the transmission medium between the sender and the receiver, by sending a message in a loop. For Link testing, the frequencies combination F3 and F7, reserved exclusively for test purpose, is used.
To schedule transmission test: Select the test periodicity by checking the corresponding button:
Daily: in this case enter the hour and minutes using the scroll-down window.
. Hourly: in this case enter the minutes using the scroll-down window.
In case of failure of the link test, if no intervention of an operator is considered necessary, the DIP stays in alarm until the next test. If the link is then restored, the equipment will be standardized.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.7.5 Limiting events
Limits lists stored in the DIP to 255 events and 255 alarms instead of 1785 each. This may be useful in case of remote access to a network to shorten the information download time.
During an intervention on running equipment, to ensure proper operation of this feature, delete the lists of events and alarms already saved in the DIPs. A warning message appears when checking or unchecking the limitation.
8.7.6
Entering comments
Enter the Source Station, the Destination Station, and your comments in compliance with the following rules: Source and destination stations: 20 characters maximum. Comments: 70 characters maximum.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 32/74 8.8 Configuring Sender Parameters To configure the Sender parameters: Open the <Configuration> window (see 8.6). Click the Sender Tab page.
FIGURE 12 CONFIGURATION SENDER TAB PAGE
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.8.1 Configuring LF band
The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity. The useful band is the part of the medium bandwidth used to send signals. Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window. Possible values are: 8.8.2 300-1900 400-2000 670-2260 850-2450 1040-2630 1220-2810 1400-3000 1590-3180 2000-3600
Configuring sender transmission levels
The Transmission levels correspond to the signal power allocated to different frequencies composing the guard or a command. The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm. To configure the Guard transmission levels and Frequency 1 to 7, select, using the scrolling button, the Transmission levels in compliance with the following rule:
The difference between sending frequency transmission levels must not exceed 16 dBm. If this rule is not applied, a warning message appears when attempting to save the configuration file.
If this warning message appears, modify the transmission levels in consequence. 8.8.3 Configuring Command transmission parameters
The following parameters must be configured when transmitting an input command: 8.8.3.1 Holding Delay Mode pulsed or not Holding delay validation Type of application (protection scheme).
Sender holding delay configuration Holding delay Parameter description
The Holding Delay parameter corresponds to the minimum transmission time of a validated command. However, if the corresponding pulsed mode box is checked, this time is a maximum, as shown above. Box corresponding to the pulsed mode not checked:
In this case, the transmission time is the maximum value between the holding delay defined and the input signal command duration.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP Example 1: Holding delay: 100 ms. The presence time of the first input signal command is 5ms.
As the 100 ms holding time exceeds the command time of 5 ms: The command will be transmitted during 100 ms. The presence time of the second input signal command is 120 ms.
As the 120 ms command time exceeds the holding time of 100 ms: The command will be transmitted during 120 ms. Parameter Values Parameter values are in ms. Range value 0 to 500 ms. Box corresponding to the pulsed mode checked:
In this case, the transmission time is the minimum value between the holding delay defined and the input signal command duration. Example 2: Holding delay: 150 ms. The presence time of the third input signal command is 5ms.
As the 150 ms holding time exceeds the command time of 5 ms: The command will be transmitted in 5 ms only. The presence time of the fourth input signal command is 200 ms.
As the 200 ms command time exceeds the Holding time of 150 ms: The command will be transmitted during a pulsed time of 150 ms. Parameter Values Parameter values are in ms. Range value 20 to 500 ms. Procedure For each command, select the Holding Delay by positioning the scrolling button. NOTE: 8.8.3.2 For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTCDIP5K-TS008
Configuring Sender input validation delay. This configuration is particular to certain specific applications. It is the validation delay parameter applicable to holding time activation. It does not apply when the pulsed mode box is checked.
Valid Hold Time Parameter description
At the receipt end the restitution of a command requires a processing time that varies according to the chosen protection scheme. To be rebuilt an input command must be transmitted during a time at least equal to the processing time. The Holding Valid Delay corresponds to a threshold applied to an input signal command duration conditioning the activation of the Holding Delay. The commands present at the input for a time less than the Validation delay of the holding time parameter are transmitted without considering the holding time programmed. This means that a command which is too short will be transmitted but we accept that restitution is not guaranteed as it is of a time shorter than the processing time required by the application. The commands present at the input whose duration is greater than the Holding Delay, are validated and transmitted for a minimum duration corresponding to the Holding Delay parameter. When the Holding Delay parameter is greater than the processing reception duration, reception of input command sent in such condition is guaranteed to be lossless. Parameter Values Parameter values are in ms. Range value 0 to 5 ms. Example E.g. holding delay 50ms, input validation delay 5ms: Command present at input for 3ms, a duration less than Holding Delay validation: the <Holding delay> is not considered, the command is sent within 3 ms without prolongation. Command present at input for 6 ms, a command acquisition duration exceeding that of the Holding Delay validation parameter: The <Holding delay> is taken into account and the command is transmitted for the Holding Delay: 50 ms. Input command 60 ms: command acquisition duration more than the Holding Delay validation parameter. Input command more than the Holding Delay. The command is transmitted during 60 ms. Procedure For each command, select the Holding Delay validation by positioning the scrolling button. NOTE: 8.8.3.3 For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTCDIP5K-TS008
Configuring the type of application of the sender This parameter depends on the protection schemes teleprotections will operate.
Parameter Description Permissive tripping commands are always monitored by a protection relay. The circuit breaker is tripped when receipt of a teleprotection command coincides with operation of the
protection relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault. The intention of these schemes is to speed up tripping for faults occurring within the protected zone. Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that detects faults external to the protected zone. Detection of an external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, receipt of the blocking signal prevents the remote end protection operating if it had detected the external fault. The risk of a spurious trip is higher. Direct tripping: remote triggering signals sent directly to the main trigger relay. Reception of the command triggers trips the circuit breaker. The method of communication must be reliable and secure because any signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at that end. Teleprotection includes two groups of protection classes, one standard and the other secured. Secured versions are more reliable, but slower. During configuration, only one or the other of these two groups can be chosen
Procedure For each command, select the type of application by selecting the value with the scroll down window. When selecting parameters from two groups by error, an error message appears.
8.8.4
Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure Depending on user needs and of the characteristics of input signals applied to the DIP, notably their duration, two procedures are available.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 38/74 8.8.4.1 Procedure without validation delay For each command
1. Using the scroll-down window select a type of application. Option: 2. Using the scroll-down window select a Holding Delay and check the Pulsed mode or not. 3. Click the button.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it. 8.8.4.2 Procedure without validation delay For each command 1. Using the scroll-down window select a type of application. 2. Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay. 3. Click the Note: button. The <Holding Delay> parameter is automatically set to a minimum value compatible with the application scheme.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it. Holding delay, Holding delay validation, and Type of application parameters are dependent. If the procedure indicated is not applied (e.g. Holding time selected before the types of application, incompatibilities may occur. In case of incompatibility when selecting the protection schemes, warning messages are displayed. More particularly, if the holding time is incompatible, the following warning message is displayed:
In this case, the minimum value for holding time is adjusted automatically to a value compatible with the protection scheme.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.8.5 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment
When you have completed Sender Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
The DIP resets.
8.9
Configuring Receiver Parameters
FIGURE 13 CONFIGURATION RECEIVER TAB PAGE
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 40/74 8.9.1 Configuring LF band
The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity. The useful band is the part of the medium bandwidth used to send signals. This may be different from the useful band chosen for the transmitter. Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window. Possible values are: 8.9.2 300-1900 400-2000 670-2260 850-2450 1040-2630 1220-2810 1400-3000 1590-3180 2000-3600
Configuring Receiver Input Level
Guard Signal This parameter defines the Guard Signal reception level. Parameter values are in dBm. Value Range -40 to 0 dBm. Select the Guard Signal input level using the scrolling button. Command / Guard relative frequency level. This parameter corresponds to the relative level between command frequencies reception level and Guard Signal. For example, it is used to compensate the effect of a boosting upon a transmission by PLC. Parameter values are in dB.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP Value Range -6 + 6 dB Select Commands / Guard Gain using the scrolling button. Note: 8.9.3
The Receiver Input level can also be set from the Maintenance window, manually or automatically.
Configuring Receiver Protection Schemes
Parameter Description There are a six types of application, the principle is identical as when configuring the transmitter. For more detail, refer to 0 Configuring the types of transmitter application When allocating a type of protection to commands, check that all types chosen belong to the same group (standard or reinforced) Procedure For each command Select the Type in the scrolling window. Note: Check that the type of protection selected belongs to the same range. 8.9.4 Configuring the status of the restitution relays upon the alarm.
Parameter Description Inactive: the command restitution relay switches to inactive in case of alarm. Former State : the restitution relay switch remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch. For each command 8.9.5 Select the Output relay status upon alarm parameter using the scrolling window.
Receiver holding delay configuration This parameter defines the minimum holding delay of command reception switches.
Range value 0 to 3000 ms by 1 ms steps. Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay. NOTE: 8.9.6 For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTCDIP5K-TS008.
Configuring unblocking parameters
Unblocking This function, commonly admitted under the name unblocking, is used to send a pulsed command in case of loss or drop in guard signal reception. Only command which type is Permissive tripping can be unblocked. Each command can be unblocked, independently of the others. For each command to unblock, check the corresponding box. Unblocking threshold It is the level of drop in guard signal reception from which the order is unblocked. Parameter values are in dB. The value range is -20 to -10 dB. Display accuracy is 0.1dB. Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window. Unblocking delay It is the time during which the unblocking condition is present before it becomes effective. Parameter values are in ms. Range value 5 to 100 ms. Display accuracy is 0.1 ms. Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window. Command delay Parameter values are in ms. Range value 30 to 500 ms. Display accuracy is 0.1 ms. Select the unblocking threshold time using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window. 8.9.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration When you have completed Receiver Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
Click the
The DIP resets. Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms. 8.10 Configuring Input/output Parameters To configure Input/Output parameters: Open the <Configuration> window (see 8.6).
FIGURE 14 INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 44/74 8.10.1 Configuring I/O Boards
An input-output board allows managing up to 4 commands. A second board provides access to the Input combination logic menu.
FIGURE 15 I/O BOARDS Select the I/O Boards parameter corresponding to your hardware configuration by checking the corresponding box. 8.10.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay
FIGURE 16 INPUT FILTER DELAY Parameter Description The Input Filter on inputs is a threshold applied to the input command signal. In case of disturbance, it allows to exclude a noise peak which may be considered as being a command. Commands with a duration less than the Input Filter Delay duration are not transmitted. Commands with a duration more than the Input Filter Delay duration are validated and transmitted. Therefore, the propagation time of the transmitted command measured between the appearance of the signal at the input and restitution will be increased by the delay of the Input Filter parameter. Parameter value Range 0 to 100 ms in 1 ms steps. Procedure For each command to which an input filter delay is to be applied: Select the value using the scrolling button or enter the parameter directly.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.10.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs This panel is only available having configured 2 I/O boards.
FIGURE 17 COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS It is used to allocate commands with logical associations between input signals. For each command the possible choices are: IN1: command 1 is allocated to the signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector) IN2: command 1 is allocated to the signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector) EN1 or EN2: command 1 is allocated to the result of the OR operator applied to the signal connected on the EN1 input (P10 connector) and EN2 input (P10 connector) i.e. command 1 will be transmitted upon a signal already present on the EN1 or EN2 inputs EN1 and EN2: command 1 is allocated to the result of the AND operator applied to the input signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector) and EN2 input (P10 connector). i.e. command 1 will be transmitted upon signals already present on the EN1 and EN2 inputs
For command 2 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN3 and EN2 by EN4. For command 3 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN5, EN2 by EN6 and P10 connector by P12 connector. For command 4 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN7, EN2 by EN8 and P10 connector by P12 connector.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 46/74 8.10.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration
When you have completed Input/Output Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
Click the
The DIP resets. Check the status of LEDs after the reset and lack of alarms. 8.11 Configuring alarm parameters To configure alarm parameters: Open the Configuration window (see 8.6). Click the Alarms tab page.
FIGURE 18 CONFIGURATION ALARMS TAB PAGE NOTE: A minor alarm indicates a problem but teleprotection continues operating.
A major alarm blocks teleprotection.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.11.1 Configuring the Alarm on external input parameter
The External alarm input comes from the transmission equipment whose DIP is connected (PLC or other). It allows to block teleprotection, after a time defined in this window, when the transmission equipment is in alarm. The transmission equipment and DIP must be interconnected with a special connection cable supporting these alarm wires. The wiring is indicated in the installation manual. Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0 to 2.5 s. The display accuracy is 0.1s. To configure Alarm on External Input: 8.11.2 Check the Alarm on external input box, Select the delay value using the scrolling button or enter it directly. Check the button for level Minor or Major button.
Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm
This alarm is set if the input command duration is more than the parameter value. Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0.5 to 10 s. The display accuracy is 0.1s. To configure Input Command Duration Alarm: Check the Input Command Duration Alarm box, Select the delay value using the scrolling button or enter it directly. Select the alarm level, Minor or Major.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 48/74 8.11.3 Configuring Alarm on Signal loss.
Alarm on Signal loss This alarm occurs if the Signal reception level at the input of the receiver, and measured through internal digital filter, is under the threshold during a Delay. The reference level is that configured on 8.9.2 Configuring the input level of the receiver. The alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit Threshold Defines the relative level under which an alarm is triggered. Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -16 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is 0.1 dBr. Delay Defines the low level signal delay from which an alarm is triggered. Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is 0.1s. To configure the Signal Loss Alarm parameters: 8.11.4 Select the threshold level using the scrolling button or enter it directly. Select the delay using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
Configuring Noise Alarm
Noise alarm This alarm occurs if the noise level, measured through internal digital filter, is above a Threshold during a Delay. The reference level is that configured on 8.9.2 Configuring the input level of the receiver. The alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit Threshold Defines the difference between noise measured and the reference level of the guard signal at the input of the receiver. The alarm is triggered when this gap is less or equal to the threshold.
Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -12 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is 0.1 dBr. Delay Parameter values are in s. The value range is 1 to 10 s. Display accuracy is 0.1 s. To configure Noise Alarm: 8.11.5 Select the threshold level using the scrolling button or enter it directly. Select the delay using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
Configuring on Link test failure
The Link test can be periodical (Daily or Hourly) launched (for settings, see 8.7.4 Configuring the link test). A punctual link test can also be launched from the toolbar (Menu Test > Link Test). In case of failed test, the latter may be repeated 3 times in a row. If the failure persists, an alarm is triggered. An alarm status is displayed in the Alarm Snapshot window. To configure this parameter, select the Minor or Major alarm level by checking the corresponding box. When a minor alarm has been defined, a new punctual test or the next programmed can be performed. The alarm will be cleared or not, according to the result. If a major alarm has been defined, the equipment will be blocked and an intervention required. 8.11.6 Configuring the Locking alarm
This alarm is triggered when the transmission medium is highly disturbed and excessive signals present at the input of the receiver over a given time may cause a risk for security or reliability of the protection scheme. If these conditions lasts for a time exceeding that defined by the user, the alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit The equipment is blocked until the medium is normalized. Parameter values are expressed in s. The value range is 1 to 10 s. To configure this parameter: Check the Locking alarm box. Select the parameter value using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 50/74 8.11.7 Configuring alarm output delay
Alarm outputs delay: Closing of the contact relays can be delayed. Possible values are: 0 2.5 s 5s 10 s
There are 4 relays, two are dedicated to major alarms and the other two to minor alarms. Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button. 8.11.8 Sending the alarms configuration When you have completed the Alarms parameters configuration as described above:
Click the
Click the
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.12 File Configuration Menu
FIGURE 19 CONFIGURATION MENU
This menu allows configuration files to be edited, saved, sent and closed. 8.12.1 Editing a configuration file The Edit menu is used to display a synthesis Parameter values window. To edit a configuration file in the Configuration window: Select File > Edit. Click the button. The following window opens:
8.12.2
Saving a configuration file Save: this menu opens a standard Windowsdialog box allowing the displayed configuration to be saved in a file. To save a configuration file:
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 52/74 Select File > Save. Give a path for the saved file and name it. 8.12.3 Sending a configuration file
Send: This menu, accessible from user level 2, is used to send the HMI displayed configuration to the unit. After receiving the configuration file, the unit resets. When the unit restarts, the sent configuration is taken into account. A configuration window is opened in the HMI using the menus File > New or File > Open or DIP > Configuration. Once modified, the configuration file can be sent to the unit using the menu File >Send or the button.
To send a configuration file:
Select File > Send or click on the The following window opens:
button.
The DIP resets. Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms. 8.12.4 Closing a configuration file Exit: This menu closes the configuration window. To close a configuration window select File > Exit 8.13 <DIP> Menu
The <DIP> menu allows to display: Configuration Hardware configuration Alarms snapshot Inputs / Outputs
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP Versions Date Setup
Refer to section 8.14 for more details. The DIP menu allows to launch the commands: 8.13.1 Reset. Save environment
Reading the configuration To read the configuration parameters: Select DIP> Configuration. The Configuration window opens:
When opening the Configuration window, the user can modify the configuration parameters (see 8.5 and next). 8.13.2 Reading the hardware configuration To read the hardware configuration: Select DIP> Hardware configuration. The Hardware window opens:
FIGURE 20 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW This window shows the hardware configuration. The units installed are accessible and the appropriate box checked. Units not installed are grayed out and not legible. 8.13.3 Reading the versions This menu allows to read the version of the EPLD and DSP firmware. To read the version: Select DIP>Versions. The following window opens:
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.13.4 Instant alarm reading To read the alarms statuses in Alarms preview: Select DIP> Preview alarms.
Check the <Auto update> box to refresh the values regularly. 8.13.5 Read input / output statuses To read input / output statuses: Select DIP> Input / Output. The following Input / Output Statuses window opens:
FIGURE 21 INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW
The Input / Output Statuses parameter represents the status of commands acquired and rendered. Two statuses are possible: < Active and Inactive>. Inactive command = Inputs in black and Outputs in blue Active command = Inputs and Outputs in red
Example of active command:
A signal command is active on EN1, the matching input is red. The signal is transmitted, Tx C1 in red, The status of the R1 command restitution is active and red. 8.14 DIP Maintenance Menus The DIP>Maintenance menu allows performing the following operations: Switch to maintenance or normal mode Unblock line or relay Local loop back Forcing transmission, reception or an alarm Reset events or alarms (local or remote) To access the Maintenance menus: Select DIP>Maintenance, the following window opens (user 2 level):
FIGURE 22 MAINTENANCE LEVELS The maintenance features available depend on the user level: 8.14.1 User level 0: only reading the input level is accessible. User level 2: access to the output level, reception level, and Forcing / Loopback / Blocking tab page is lost.
Switch to Maintenance / Normal mode
Switching to the maintenance mode is available from user 2 level. To switch from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode: Select Mode>Normal mode. In the normal mode, the <Level> tab page is available. To switch from the Normal mode to the Maintenance mode: Select Mode>Maintenance. In the Maintenance mode, the <Forcing / Locking / Looping> tab page is available.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 58/74 8.14.2 Maintenance status bar The Maintenance status bar displays the following elements: Line status (blocked / unblocked) Relay status (blocked / unblocked) Loopback status on / off.
8.14.3
Reading the input level measurement
This screen, accessible from the user level 0, allows reading the input level in the graphic form. The digital values are also displayed in the upper part of the screen. The value range is -45 to 15 dBr, nominal value for receiver alignment being 0 dBr. The display accuracy is 0.1 dBr. Click the button to display the values to be refreshed.
Click the Automatic refresh button to display the values to be refreshed regularly.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.14.4 Configuring the output levels setting
This screen, accessible from the user level 2, allows defining the guard signal output levels as well as those of the command frequencies. The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm. Procedure For the guard frequency and frequency 1 to 7: Select the output level using the scrolling button or enter it directly. Once the operation has been completed, click the button.
Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to 0 8.14.5 Configuring the reception level
This screen, accessible from user 2 level, allows to adjust the level of reception. Guard frequency The level of reception of guard frequencies is expressed directly in dBm. This level can be set between -45 dBm and +15 dBm. Display accuracy is 0.1dBm. Command / Guard relative level The Commands / Guard relative level is expressed in dB.
This level is adjustable between 0 and +6dB in the normal mode and between 0 and +16dB in the enhanced mode. Settings are made while considering the level of output and attenuation of the medium. Display accuracy is 0.1dBm. Settings of the Guard and Commands / Guard relative level parameters are independent, and must be sent separately. Procedure Select the output level using the Guard scrolling button or enter it directly. Click the button.
Select the Command / Guard relative level scrolling button or enter it directly. Click the button.
Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to 0 8.14.6 Align automatically This procedure allows automatic adjustment of the alignment level of the receiver in respect of the guard signal received. During the automatic setting procedure, check that the line and relays are properly locked (see 8.14.2.). Indeed, if the unblocking function is programmed, an unblocking error can be issued when the difference between the new setting and the previous exceeds the threshold programmed. (see 8.9.6) To launch automatic alignment: The button is accessible on the user 2 level.
The following window opens, indicating that automatic alignment has started:
Once the alignment is complete, the following message is displayed:
Click the
button.
Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to the next paragraph.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.14.7 Saving level settings.
The settings of the output level and reception level (manual or automatic) are active but lost after a reset. Once the settings are complete, close the Maintenance window to save them: A pop-up window opens:
Answer
A message appears, confirming that the DIP has been reset. The settings are stored in flash memory, and remain active after a potential reset. 8.14.8 Configuring forcing and loopback This tab page is accessible on the user 2 level and in the Maintenance mode. To access the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback window, open the Maintenance window and select the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback tab page.
FIGURE 23 MAINTENANCE FORCING
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 62/74 8.14.9 Unlocking feature
This window is common to two features, unlocking and loopback ; The AF line statuses and relays are: Unblocked Blocked
Unlock AF line: this status is used to connect the teleprotection transmitter to the transmission line. This operating mode allows sending the commands issued in the maintenance mode over the transmission link. During a maintenance operation, apply all precautions, considering the risk of untimely command transmission commands, as the operator can simulate the acquisition of a command. Lock AF line: this status is used to disconnect the teleprotection transmitter from the transmission line. No maintenance operation will be transmitted online. The operator can then simulate safely a command acquisition. Relay unlocking: when this status is activated, the output of the relays complies with the command conditions present in the reception line. Take all precautions required during maintenance operations, as this operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command reception in case of simulation of command restitution by the operator. Relay locking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays are forced to the inactive status, regardless of the command conditions present in the reception line. Procedure To unlock Line AF: Check the Line AF box To lock Line AF Un Check the line AF box To unlock Contact Relay Check the Contact Relay box To lock Contact relay Un Check the Contact Relay box Once the Loop and Unlock parameters are configured: Click the button,
Check the update status of your settings in the bottom bar:
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.14.10 Configuring input/output loopback
Loopback In this mode, the transmission is looped back to reception even if access to the sending medium is blocked. Procedure To activate loopback: Select Active by checking the appropriate box. To deactivate the loopback: Select Inactive by checking the appropriate box. Click the button.
Check the condition for updating the settings in the bottom bar: 8.14.11 Forcing the transmitter
Freq 8 corresponds to the guard frequency, Freq 1 to Freq 7 are used to code the commands. As two frequencies are required to code commands, and the frequencies being forced separately, there is no risk of sending a command by frequency forcing. This screen is used to send frequencies corresponding to different statuses over unblocked lines: inactivity, command or test message. To use this feature, the copy relays must be unblocked at all times. To force a frequency: Check the appropriate box. Click the button.
The forced frequency becomes red: To interrupt forcing, click the button.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 64/74 8.14.12 Forcing output relays
This screen is used to force the status of command rendering relays on the local unit. The command output relays will be activated only if the relays are unblocked. The copy relays must be unblocked at all times. To force an output relay: Check the appropriate box. Click the button.
The forced command becomes red: To interrupt forcing, click the 8.14.13 Forcing PLC commands button.
Forcing Transmission Reception When commands are sent or received via the PLC, transmission / reception of the other signals (telephony, data) can be blocked to ensure all power is available for these orders. Transmission and reception signals are sent with the commands to activate the blocking feature. Forcing PLC commands allows activating the transmission / reception blocking feature, to check its operational status. Check PLC transmission blocking (BLE feature):
Check the Active box under Transmission.
Click the The active box turns red
button.
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay is activated, the contact between the terminals 3 and 10 of connector P18 is closed. To interrupt forcing, click the button.
Check PLC transmission blocking (BLR feature):
Check the Active box under Reception. Click the The active box turns red: Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 5-12 of connector P18 is closed. To interrupt forcing, click the Active Inactive forcing button. button.
When a DIP becomes inactive (supply failure, major alarm), the relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 (presence circuit) closes to inform the PLC. Inactive forcing allows simulating the absence of the DIP. To force the inactive status of the DIP: Check the Inactive box The Inactive box turns red: Click the button.
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 is closed. EXT command
This part allows to check the presence of an external alarm between terminals 6-13 of connector P18. This contact allows the DIP to be informed of the presence of the equipment it is connected to (e.g. PLC) In case of an external alarm, Active is displayed in yellow: In case of lack of external alarm, Inactive is displayed in green: .
8.14.14 Alarms forcing This function allows forcing the contacts of the major and minor alarms
To force the alarms: Check the Minor or Major box, or both. Click the button.
The other parts of the window are grayed out and inaccessible. Check the alarms status LEDs, check that the switches of corresponding alarms on connector P16 are closed. To interrupt forcing, click the 8.15 Date setup button.
Set the date in the PC Time / Date section of the window. By default, the PC parameters are proposed. For other choices, enter the information related with the date and time required, Click the button to copy the settings in the DIP section.
Note: 8.16 Resetting the DIP
The date can also be displayed and set by clicking the the upper tool bar.
button in
To reset the DIP from the DIP menu: Select DIP> Reset. A confirmation message is then displayed, in a scroll down window:
Answer
The following window opens, indicating that resetting is in progress.
After restarting the DIP, check the status of LEDs and lack of alarms. 8.17 <History> Menu
FIGURE 24 HISTORY MENU There are two types of history: Non time-stamped (counters) Time-stamped by the internal clock (events / alarms)
The <History> menu allows to display the following information: Events files Alarms files Counters
The <History> also allows to clear events and alarms histories. CAUTION: 8.17.1 Events reading To read events: Select History>Events. The following message is displayed in a pop-up window when loading events: ONCE THE HISTORIES HAVE BEEN CLEARED, THE INFORMATION CAN NO LONGER BE RETRIEVED
Note:
Events reading is also possible by clicking the upper tool bar.
button in the
The memory has a capacity of 1785 events, it may be limited to 255 per configuration (see 8.7.5 Limiting events)
FIGURE 25 EVENT WINDOW DUAL TONE The File menu is used to save and print events files (*.event), but also exit the events file:
and Print
button refreshes the events list.
The File menu in the main window allows opening the events files (*.event):
The events time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new event replaces the older event saved. 8.17.2 Alarms reading To read the alarms: Select History>Alarms. The following message is displayed in a pop-up window when loading alarms:
Note:
Alarms reading is also possible by clicking the upper tool bar.
button in the
FIGURE 26 ALARMS WINDOW The File menu is used to save and print alarms files (*.alarm), but also exit the alarms file:
and Print
button refreshes the alarms list.
The File menu in the main window allows the alarms files (*.alarm):
The alarms time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new alarm replaces the first alarm saved. 8.17.3 Reading counters To read information of the counters, select History > Counters. The following screen opens.
FIGURE 27 LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS WINDOW The File menu is used to save and print counter files (*.cnter), but also exit the counter file:
The Save and Print files respectively.
and refresh
buttons allow to save, print or update the
The File menu in the main window allows opening the counter files (*.cnter):
The memorization capacity of the counters is limited to 65535. 8.17.4 Deleting events The Delete the events option allows deleting all events displayed in the list. Note: This option fully deletes system events and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the events at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the events list before using the Delete>Events option.
To delete the events list currently displayed. Select History>Delete >Delete events.
Answer
Check that the events file is empty by selecting History>Events.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 72/74 8.17.5 Deleting alarms
The Delete the alarms option allows deleting all alarms displayed in the list. Note: This option fully deletes system alarms and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the alarms at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the alarms list before using the Delete>Alarms option.
To delete the alarms list currently displayed: Select History>Delete >Delete alarms.
Answer
Check that the alarms file is empty by selecting History>Alarms.
Human Machine Interface DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP 8.18 <Test> Menu
The link test allows checking the ability of the DIP link to sent and receive commands in the bidirectional mode. The automatic launching of the link test can also be planned daily or hourly (see 8.5.7 for settings). Command processing overrides the link test. To launch the link test: Select Test>Link test. In case of bad results after 3 tests, a DIP fault is declared. A minor or major alarm is defined, according to the alarm configuration (refer to ). When the alarm is defined as minor, the next link test, automatic or not, normalizes or maintains the alarm. 8.19 <Factory> Menu This menu offers a single choice
This menu disconnects the battery (the factory exit status). The latter is restarted automatically once the date set. (see 0) 8.20 <Help> Menu
This menu provides access to the help documentation and allows to read the software version of the HMI. 8.20.1 Access to the help files To access the User Manual, select Help>User Manual. Click the manual chosen, the corresponding pdf document opens.
DIP/EN HI/A23 Page 74/74 8.20.2 Reading the software version of the HMI To read the software version of the HMI: Select Help>About, the following window opens:
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP
DIP/EN HI/B23

PART 3: DIP DIGITAL
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 1/60
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2.
2.1 2.2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

Information presentation Example in a paragraph
7 8
8 8
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3
OVERVIEW
Foreword System Required Installing the HMI
9
9 9 9
4.
4.1 4.2

User level structure Menus
10
10 11
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
DIP SECURITY PASSWORD MANAGEMENT

Rules for Password Creation Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu Creating User Password with the <Create Passwords> Menu Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> Exiting the Password Manager Viewing the software version of the Password Manager
12
12 12 13 14 15 15 15
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7
Main screen Description Title bar Menu bar Toolbar Pop-up menus Status bars Work and dialog zone.
16
16 16 17 17 17 18 19
7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6
<File> Menu <Tools> Menu <Read> Menu <Date> Menu <Maintenance> menu <?> Menu
20
20 20 21 21 21 21
8.
8.1 8.2
8.2.1 8.2.2
OPERATION OF THE HMI

Launching the HMI Configuration procedure
Configuration procedure from the <File> menu Configuration procedure from the <Read> menu
22
22 22
22 22
8.3
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5
<Tools> Menu
User level selection Returning to level 0 Modify the password Connect the HMI from the DIP Disconnecting the HMI
22
23 23 23 24 24
8.4
8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3
Configuration window
Access to the Configuration window Configuration window - <File> menu Configuration window - <Modify> menu
24
24 26 27
8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8

8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3
Configuring General Parameters Configuring the parameters of the communication interface Configuring the redundancy interface Configuring Input/output Parameters
Input filter configuration Input logic configuration State of output on Communication Major Alarm
27 29 31 33
33 34 35
8.9
8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3
Application parameters configuration

Configuration of transmission holding delays Configuration of the holding times for a command restitution Teleprotection scheme configuration
36
36 37 37
8.10
8.10.1 8.10.2 8.10.3 8.10.4
Alarm parameters configuration

Configuration of the bit error rate threshold Configuration of the prolonged command alarm Configuration of the communication time alarm Configuration of the command relay delay
38
39 39 39 40
8.11 8.12 8.13
Entering comments Sending a configuration file <Read> Menu
40 41 41
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.13.1 8.13.2 8.13.3 8.13.4 8.13.5 8.13.6 8.13.7 8.13.8 8.13.9 Menu Description Reading a configuration Reading the hardware configuration Reading the DIP firmware version Read comments Read an events list Read an alarms list Reading counters Reading instant alarms
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 3/60 41 43 43 44 44 45 46 47 48 49
8.13.10 Read input / output statuses
8.14
8.14.1 8.14.2
<Date> Menu
Read the date Writing the date
49
49 50
8.15
8.15.1 8.15.2 8.15.3 8.15.4 8.15.5 8.15.6 8.15.7 8.15.8 8.15.9
<Maintenance> menu
Switch to the maintenance / operating mode Blocking / Unblocking Loopback Forcing Transmitter forcing Restitution forcing Alarms forcing Interface forcing Reset
50
51 52 52 52 53 54 54 55 56 56
8.15.10 Resetting the DIP
8.16 8.17 8.18
Expert Menu Reading the version of the HMI Exit the HMI.
57 57 57
9.
9.1 9.2
EXAMPLE OF REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION

Example description Prior conditions
58
58 58
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION FIGURE 3 MENU BAR FIGURE 4 TOOLBAR FIGURE 5 MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR FIGURE 6 EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY FIGURE 7 FILE MENU FIGURE 8 MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW FIGURE 9 CONFIGURATION WINDOW TOOLBAR FIGURE 10 CONFIGURATION FILE MENU FIGURE 11 CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION FIGURE 12 EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENTS LIST FIGURE 13 EXAMPLE OF READING IN THE ALARMS LIST FIGURE 14 EXAMPLE OF LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS 16 17 17 18 19 20 25 25 26 30 45 46 47
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION A B C D DATE 04/01/2001 23/08/2004 12/07/2006 14/11/2007 COMMENTS Original issue ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version New features and additional technical explanations New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, single tone analog and dual tone analog. Minor corrections Version 2.2 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 optical interface IR187 Version 2.3 State of output on Communication Major Alarm added
E A22 B22 A23 B23
11/02/2008 15/04/2009 23/12/2009 13/01/2011 28/03/2011
GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine Interface of the e-terragridcom DIP, i.e. the microcomputing application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.
DEFINITIONS
HMI Configuration Configuration File Input password User level Level password Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface). All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection. Micro-computer file containing components of a teleprotection. all the configuration
Password for accessing the Password Manager utility. All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator. Password for accessing a user level.
NOTE:
1.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(1)
(1)
2.

2.1
Information presentation Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1>Menu_level_entry2>. Example: select File>New. In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu. In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>. A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.
2.2
Example in a paragraph <HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <> To clear events (requires level 2): Select History>Erase>Erase Events INDICATES THE ACCESS PATH
A <CAUTION> confirmation window opens: NAME OF THE WINDOW BETWEEN <>
Answer
.SHOWS THE BUTTON
3.
3.1
OVERVIEW
Foreword Thanks to its power and easy use, the HMI of the DIP teleprotection allows, either locally or remotely: complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools, filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions), time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics), interactive and user-friendly maintenance, printing of unit parameters. This software has not been modified by adding new boards to the equipment: The SR200 board does not require programming, The IR187 board will be recognized automatically ; refer to chapter 8.6.
3.2
System Required The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum: 40 MB free space on the HD, 256 MB RAM. A serial port, except if the DIP features the ME50 option which has an IP/RS232 converter
IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI. When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter rather than a USB converter. 3.3 Installing the HMI For safety purposes, we recommend installing the HMI from a copy of the disc supplied. Installation: Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive. Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:setup. Follow the instructions.
4.
4.1

User level structure The DIP places operations in hierarchical order: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator. The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2. Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 4.2 Menus
Level Menus File New Open Exit Tools User level selection Returning to level 0 Modify the password Connect Disconnect Reading (local / remote) * Configuration Hardware configuration Version Comments Events file Alarms file Counters Alarms snapshot Input/Output Remote reading Date (local / remote) * Bit error rate read write Maintenance * Maintenance mode/Operating mode unblocking line (security) line** unblocking line (security) relay** Local loop back** remote loop back** transmitter forcing** restitution forcing** alarms forcing** interface forcing** Reset (local / remote) Reset (local / remote) Save environment TABLE 1 MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL * To access these menus, you need to be connected. ** Accessible only in maintenance mode *** Accessible only in case of optical/electrical redundancy x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
5.
DIP SECURITY PASSWORD MANAGEMENT

5.1
Rules for Password Creation Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following: upper case (A to Z) lower case (a to z) numbers (0 to 9) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ { | } ~
5.2
Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and <List>. To access the Password Manager menus: Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management> window opens:
Select Password > Input, the <Password Input> window opens:
Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login). Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended after the first use (see the next paragraph). button.
Click the
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP The following window opens:
The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available. 5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password. Upon first use, use the DIP5000 password (upper case without the quotes). We recommend to then modify this password. Access the Manager menu (see 5.2) Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:
Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see 5.1).
Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled. Click the button. The following window opens:
Confirm the new password by re-entering it. The following window opens:
5.4
Click the
button.
Creating User Password with the <Create Passwords> Menu Several passwords may be created. To create user passwords, select <Create Passwords>. The <Enter password s> window below opens:
Enter the new password in the <Input password> field, in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see 5.1). Define the user level associated with the password by checking the Level 2 button. Click the button. A confirmation messages appears:
Click the
button.
If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Password> window. Once the operation has been completed, click the list of passwords (refer to the next paragraph). button. Check the
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords>
To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> of the Password Manager
The list of passwords is displayed. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the button. A confirmation message opens, answer 5.6 Exiting the Password Manager To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit. 5.7 Viewing the software version of the Password Manager Select ?> About. The following window opens:
6.
6.1
Main screen Description The base screen includes 5 functional zones (figure 1 and figure 2 below):
FIGURE 2 EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION 6.2 Title bar The title bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 6.3 Menu bar
The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS HMI menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).
FIGURE 4 TOOLBAR 6.5 Pop-up menus Right-click the workspace once logged onto a unit to display a pop-up menu to perform reading operations on the local or remote unit.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 18/60 6.6 Status bars
Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information: When the HMI is connected to the DIP in the maintenance mode, the upper bar is displayed:
line status (blocked / unblocked) restitution relay status (blocked / unblocked) type of loopback (local loopback / remote loopback)
The status bar is displayed:
the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon) the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance) address of the link or other information entered as comment transmission time bit error rate any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm) user level (0 or 2)
FIGURE 5 MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 6.7 Work and dialog zone.
Most orders are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used: optional button groups tick boxes command buttons text boxes lists cursors
7.
7.1
<File> Menu The <File> menu provides access to elements allowing to create, modify and send configuration files. It also allows to open archived alarms files (*.Ala) and event files (*.Evt).
FIGURE 7 FILE MENU New: this menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration. Open: this menu allows opening a previously saved configuration file or opening a list of alarms or events. 3 types of file can be opened: *.Cfg -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see figure 8) *.Ala -> alarm list file for consultation (see figure 13 for the window display) *.Evt -> event list file for consultation (see figure 11 for the window display)
Exit: closes the HMI program. 7.2 <Tools> Menu User level selection: this menu allows to modify a user level. Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege. Modify the password: this menu allows to enter a password saved in the CPU. Connect: this menu allows to log onto the DIP and PC. Disconnect: this menu allows to log off the DIP and PC.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 7.3 <Read> Menu
This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local or remote unit: Configuration: read all configuration parameters, Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters, Version: read firmware versions. Comments: read comments. Events file: read the events list. Alarms file: read the alarms list. Counters: read the local command counters. Alarms snapshot: snapshot of the current alarm status. Input/Output: read input and output status.
In addition, remote reading provides access to: 7.4 Bit error rate: bit error rate instant indication.
<Date> Menu This menu enables you to read or write the date and time on the local or remote unit: Read: read the date and time on the local or remote unit. Write: write the date and time of the local or remote unit, either by copying the date and time of the PC, or sending a date and time chosen by the user.
7.5
<Maintenance> menu Selecting this menu allows the following maintenance actions to be performed: Maintenance Mode: toggles between operating and maintenance modes. Blocking: allows to block or unblock the communication line and command restitution relays. Loopback: allows to perform a loopback either on the level of the local unit or remote unit. Forcing: allows to force commands in transmission or reception as well as force alarms relays. Interface: allows to force the optical or redundancy interface. Reset: allows to clear the history lists of events and alarms, as well as counters of the local or remote equipment. Reset: performs a hardware or software reset of the local or remote unit. Save environment: allows to save the events, alarms and counters lists in the .csv Excel-compatible format. These files are placed in a directory where the HMI is installed.
7.6
<?> Menu About: Indicates the software version of the HMI Documentation: access to user manuals when they are installed.
8.
8.1
OPERATION OF THE HMI

Launching the HMI To launch the HMI, click the HMI icon
8.2
Configuration procedure Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations. The configuration of a new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating or modifying a configuration file by means of a configuration window (see 8.4). The configuration window is accessible from the menu bar in two ways: <File> Menu <Read> Menu
8.2.1
Configuration procedure from the <File> menu 1. Click File>New or File>Open. 2. Modify the displayed configuration. 3. Save the changed configuration (File>Save as>). 4. Send the configuration to the unit.
8.2.2
Configuration procedure from the <Read> menu The configuration of the local or remote unit can be modified by reading this configuration: 1. Click Read>Local> or Remote>Configuration. 2. Modify the displayed configuration. 3. Save the changed configuration (File>Save as>). 4. Send the configuration to the unit.
8.3
<Tools> Menu The <Tools> menu allows entering a user password, return to the user 0 level and log on or log off the HMI application.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.3.1 User level selection
When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0. To access a level 2, the user must enter a password. The level depends on the password. For more details about user level and password management see 4. 1. Select Tools>Select user level. The <Enter password> window opens:
2. Enter the password. 3. Check the level granted in the status bar.
The password created previously is saved in the PC. If lost, just reinstall the HMI application on the PC and create the passwords again. 8.3.2 Returning to level 0 The user may return to level 0 at any time. To set the user level to 0: 1. Select Tools>Return to level 0. 2. Check the user level 8.3.3 Modify the password Use the <Modify the password > submenu to create and / or change the embedded password. For more safety, this password is then saved in the unit. in the status bar
PLEASE NOTE THAT IF YOU FORGET THE EMBEDDED PASSWORD, IT MAY BE RESET ONLY BY RETURNING THE MOTHERBOARD (UT148) TO THE PLANT.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 24/60 8.3.4 Connect the HMI from the DIP Click the Connect icon to open the <Connect> window
You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite. Check the status information in the status bar. Note: When the HMI is connected to the DIP, the information is displayed in the upper bar. For more information on the status bar information, refer to chapter 6.6.
8.3.5
Disconnecting the HMI To log off the HMI: 1. Select Tools> Disconnect. 2. The HMI is logged off, the Read, Data and Maintenance options are grayed out and inaccessible.
8.4 8.4.1
Configuration window Access to the Configuration window Two methods allow to open the Configuration window from the <File>: 1. Select File> New to open a default configuration file. 2. Select File> Open to open an existing configuration file.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP The following window opens:
FIGURE 8 MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW Note: Opening the configuration window is also possible via the menu bar by selecting Read > Local> Configuration.
The configuration window allows reading, modifying or creating configuration files. Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.
FIGURE 9 CONFIGURATION WINDOW TOOLBAR
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 26/60 8.4.2 Configuration window - <File> menu
FIGURE 10 CONFIGURATION FILE MENU This menu allows configuration files to be saved, printed and closed. Saving a configuration To save a configuration: 1. Select File > Save. 2. Select a directory in the Windows environment. 3. Name the *.cfg file. To print a configuration, select File > Print. To exit the configuration window, select File> Exit.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.4.3 Configuration window - <Modify> menu This menu allows to modify a configuration (default or new configuration). To modify a configuration from the menu bar:
1. Select File>New or File>Open. The following configuration window opens:
8.5
Configuring General Parameters 1. Open the Main Configuration window (see 8.4). 2. Select Modify>General. The <General configuration> window opens:
If necessary, modify the following parameter values: Com. link: enter a value between 0 and 124.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 28/60 Note:
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP The remote unit and local DIP must have the same logical address.
Configuration: check the 2, 4 or 8 commands button. Please note that the 8 commands box is accessible only when 2 input/output boards were entered in the Input/Output window HMI port speed: select the value 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps using the scroll down window. The HMI will attempt to connect at the speed defined, in case of bad link, it will attempt to connect at lower speeds. Master / slave: select the master or slave value for a unit. A DIP teleprotection unit must be composed of a master unit and the other slave unit. IRIG-B: select the value Off or On by checking the appropriate box. Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector. Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds). Limited log length: Limits lists stored in the DIP to 255 events and 255 alarms instead of 1785 each. This may be useful in case of remote access to a network to shorten the information download time. During an intervention on running equipment, to ensure proper operation of this feature, delete the lists of events and alarms already saved in the DIPs. Configuring number of I/O board : Select the matching the hardware configuration (1 or 2 boards) by checking the corresponding box.
3. Once all parameters defined, click the The <General configuration> window closes.
button.
4. Check that the configuration window was updated with the new parameter values:
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.6 Configuring the parameters of the communication interface 1. Open the Configuration window (see 8.4).
2. Select <Modify> Communication interface. The <Interface> window opens:
3. Select the interface module corresponding to the hardware configuration on the scrolling windows. Possible values are: IR182 (optical interface). To be chosen for an IR182 board or an IR187 board in IR182 mode. IR173 G703-6 (2 MBps) IR179 V11 (RS 422) IR180 G703-1 codirectional (64 kbps) IR185 C37-94 (optical fiber interface). To be chosen for an IR185 board or an IR187 board in C37.94 mode. button. The following window opens:
4. Click the
5. Select the value Clock Source, Received or Internal, by checking the corresponding button. The following table indicates the type of source according to the case: Type of interface DIP connected to a transmission unit Local IR173 IR180 IR182 or (2) IR187 IR182(3) IR185 or (2) IR187 * Received Received N/A Received Received Remote Received Received N/A Received Received DIP direct copper connection (laboratory test) Local Internal Internal N/A N/A N/A Remote Received Received N/A N/A N/A DIP connected to an optical fiber** Local N/A N/A Internal N/A Internal Remote N/A N/A Internal N/A Received
Case of the IR182 connected to the OCM5000, optical/V11 converter. This mode is not compatible with the IR187 board.
** The C37.94 mode is recommended with the IR187 board for this application.
Type of interface
DIP connected to a transmission unit Local Remote NORMAL

(Tx and Rx clocks received)
DIP direct copper connection (laboratory test) Local NORMAL Remote H2

Rate to be selected between 32 and 256 kbps
DIP in loopback (laboratory test) Local H1

Rate to be selected between 32 and 256 kbps
Remote
Loopback of T on R and S on S'
IR179
NORMAL
(Tx and Rx clocks received)
FIGURE 11 CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION 6. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.
When an IR187 board is used, the parameter indicates its programming mode, i.e. IR182 or IR185 for the C37.94 mode.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.7 Configuring the redundancy interface
With the optical interfaces IR182 and IR185, redundancy can be ensured with another digital interface IR173, 179 or 180. The Redundancy interface corresponds to the redundant digital interface. Prior conditions The redundancy interface can be configured only if an optical interface was selected as communication interface (see 8.6). Procedure 1. 2. Open the <Configuration> window (see 2). Select <Modify> Redundancy interface. The <Redundancy interface> window opens:
3.
Select the digital interface corresponding to the hardware configuration in the scrolling window. Possible values: IR 180 IR 173 IR179 button. The following window opens:
4.
Click the
5.
Select the value Clock Source, Received or Internal, by checking the corresponding button.
6.
Click the
7. Select the value of the TOGGLE delay parameter by placing the cursor properly. The possible values are between 5 ms and 100 ms. This means defining the time after which interface toggling will be performed. 8. Click the button.
9. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.8 Configuring Input/output Parameters 1. Open the Configuration window (see 8.4). 2. Select Modify > Input / Output.
The <Input Output Configuration> window below opens:
8.8.1
Input filter configuration Input filter The Input filter delay corresponds to the minimum time for a signal command to be considered. Select the delay matching each command using the cursor. A window displaying the numeric values allows placing the cursor on the value required. The possible values are between 0 ms and 100 ms, by 1-ms steps. We recommend to always leave a 1mS filtering minimum for the best protection against parasite signals which may be present on the command inputs. For more information on this feature, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008
Reverse logic configuration Parameter Description
Note: Using the reverse logic function, an idle input corresponds to a command. The matching input must be activated to stop sending commands Procedure Check the box associated with a command to apply reverse logic.
A warning message appears to indicate that a command will be sent until the input is activated.
8.8.2
Input logic configuration Parameter Description This logic allows to allocate a logical operator to a board input, then allocate a command. This function is available only when two boards are installed. Logical operator available: OR,AND,LOG OR A command is emitted when one or the other inputs is active. AND A command is emitted when the two associated inputs are active.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP LOG
The following table describes the outputs corresponding to the possible combination of input signals for the LOG operator.
INPUT 1 0 1 1 0 INPUT 2 1 0 1 0 OUTPUT 0 1 PREVIOUS STATE PREVIOUS STATE
Procedure To configure the input logic feature: 1. Click the button in the configuration window to pen the following window:
2. Check the box of the logical operator to allocate to a command. 3. Click the 4. Click the button in the <Input logic> window. button in the <Input Output Configuration> window.
The <Input Output Configuration> window closes. 5. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.
8.8.3
State of output on Communication Major Alarm Parameter Description Idle: the restitution relay is set to the idle state in case of alarm. Former state: the restitution relay contact remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch. For each command Select the Relay state on alarm parameter using the scrolling window.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 36/60 8.9 Application parameters configuration 1. Open the Configuration window (see 8.4). 2. Select Modify>Application parameters: The following window opens:
8.9.1
Configuration of transmission holding delays
The transmission holding delay corresponds to the validity time of an input command. In the Transmission part, check the command to which a holding time is to be applied. Click inside the green zone and enter the delay value (range of values from 20 to 200 ms).
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.9.2 Configuration of the holding times for a command restitution
This parameter corresponds to the validity time of a command restitution. 1. Check the command restitution concerned. 2. Set the delay using the cursor (1 to 3000 ms). 3. Repeat this configuration for each command restitution to which a delay is to be applied. For more information on configuring the holding times, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008 8.9.3 Teleprotection scheme configuration 1. In the scroll-down menu, select the teleprotection scheme of the receiver to apply to commands 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8: Presmissive trip Teletrip Blocking
2. Click the
button.
3. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.
8.10
Alarm parameters configuration 1. Open the <Configuration> window (see 8.4). 2. Select Modify > Alarms. The < Alarms Configuration> window opens:
REMINDER: A MINOR ALARM INDICATES A PROBLEM BUT THE EQUIPMENT CONTINUES OPERATING. A MAJOR ALARM INDICATES A PROBLEM BUT THE EQUIPMENT IS BLOCKED. COMMAND ACQUISITION AND RESTITUTION ARE INHIBITED.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.10.1 Configuration of the bit error rate threshold
1. Check the Bit error rate button corresponding to the minor alarm threshold required. 2. Check the Bit error rate button corresponding to the major alarm threshold required. 3. We recommend to leave the default values. 1xE-3 for the minor alarm and 1xE-2 for the major alarm. 8.10.2 Configuration of the prolonged command alarm
I If an input signal exceeds the threshold defined, an alarm is triggered. 1. Check the Alarm upon prolonged command box. 2. Place the cursor to define a duration (between 1 and 30 seconds per 1-second steps). 3. Allocate a minor or major level by checking the corresponding button. 8.10.3 Configuration of the communication time alarm
If the communication time exceeds the threshold defined, an alarm is triggered. 1. Check the Alarm upon communication time box. 2. Place the cursor to define a transmission time (between 3 and 20 ms). 3. Allocate a minor or major level by checking the corresponding button.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 40/60 8.10.4 Configuration of the command relay delay
Closing of the contact relay can be delayed. Possible values are: 0 2.5 s 5s 10 s
For each relay 1 and 2, a major alarm and a minor alarm are possible: Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button. 8.11 Entering comments The user can enter comments. To enter comments: 1. Open the Configuration window (see 8.4). 2. Select Modify > Comments. The following window opens:
1. Fill in the following information fields: Local station name (20 characters max) Remote station name (20 characters max)
2. Enter the comments in the <Comments> field.
3. Click the
button.
4. Enter the comments in the <Configuration> field.
8.12
Sending a configuration file This menu allows to send a configuration from the PC HMI to the teleprotection unit. Prior conditions Sending a configuration is possible with the user 2 level. The HMI must be connected to the teleprotection unit. Procedure To send the configuration, select the <Send> menu (Local or Remote) from the <Configuration> menu:
If the configuration transmission is successful, a message window opens:
Click the OK button, the DIP resets. 8.13 8.13.1 <Read> Menu Menu Description
The <Read> menu allows to display the following information on the local or remote teleprotection unit: Configuration
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 42/60 Hardware configuration DIP firmware version Comments Event list Alarms list Counters Alarms snapshot Inputs / Outputs state
Remote bit error rate (the local bit error rate is displayed permanently in the lower status bar)
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.13.2 Reading a configuration
To read the local configuration, select Read> Local> Configuration. The following configuration window opens:
Note:
To read the remote Configuration.
configuration,
select
Read>
Remote>
8.13.3
Reading the hardware configuration To read the local hardware configuration, select Read> Local> Hardware configuration. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 44/60 8.13.4 Reading the DIP firmware version
To read the software version in local, select Read> Local> Version. The following window opens:
8.13.5
Read comments To read comments, select Read> Local> Comments. The following window opens:
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.13.6 Read an events list
To read events, select Read> Local>Events list. The following window opens:
FIGURE 12 EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENTS LIST The capacity of the list is 1785 events. Click the tool to refresh the list
Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the events file (*.evt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen. Click the printer tool Click the (or use the menu File>Print) to print the events file.
tool to export the events file in the Excel compatible format.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 46/60 8.13.7 Read an alarms list
To read the alarms list in local, select Read> Local> Alarms list. The following window opens:
FIGURE 13 EXAMPLE OF READING IN THE ALARMS LIST The capacity of the list is 1785 alarms. Click the tool to refresh the list
Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the events file (*.evt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen. Click the printer tool Click the (or use the menu File>Print) to print the events file.
tool to export the alarms file in the Excel compatible format.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.13.8 Reading counters
To read the counters, select Read> Local> Counter. The following window opens:
FIGURE 14 EXAMPLE OF LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS Click the tool to refresh the list
Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the counters file (*.cpt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen. Click the printer tool (or use the menu File>Print) to print the alarms file.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 48/60 8.13.9 Reading instant alarms
To read instant alarms, select Read> Local> Instant alarms. The following window opens:
Check the Refresh box to refresh the view automatically every 3 seconds. Note: Instant alarms can also be read by clicking Alarm visible in the status bar in case of alarm.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.13.10 Read input / output statuses
To read input / output statuses, select Read> Local> Input Output. The following window opens:
This view is refreshed automatically every 3 seconds. 8.14 <Date> Menu The <Date> menu allows to read or write the date of local or remote teleprotection unit. 8.14.1 Read the date Select Date> Local> Read. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 50/60 8.14.2 Writing the date Select Date> Local> Write. The following window opens:
The scrolling menus allow selecting the day, month, year and time.
8.15
<Maintenance> menu Level 2 is required to access this command
The <Maintenance> menu allows the following operations: <Maintenance mode / Operating mode>: switch to the maintenance mode or operating mode. <Blocking / unblocking>: restitution relays. blocking / unblocking the communication line and
<Loopback>: local or remote loopback. Remote loopback is accessible only if the line has been unblocked. <Forcing>: transmitter, command restitution alarms. <Interface> (accessible in operating mode and only when redundancy has been activated): forces the active interface (optical or redundancy).
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP <reset>: clear events, alarms or counters (local or remote). <Reset> local or remote. Resetting the DIP
<Save environment>, allows saving the files of events, alarms or counters in the Excel-compatible format THE HMI DOES NOT OPERATE AS A SIMULATOR. MORE PARTICULARLY, FORCING TRIGGERS ACTUAL COMMAND TRANSMISSIONS AND RENDERING. THEREFORE, UNTIMELY USE OF THESE COMMANDS MAY HAVE A SEVERE IMPACT ON THE OPERATION.
8.15.1
Switch to the maintenance / operating mode To switch from the Maintenance mode to the operating mode (requires level 2) 1. Select Maintenance>Operating mode. The following window appears and displays a message indicating data was transmitted successfully:
2. Check that
appears in the status bar.
To switch from the <Maintenance> mode to the <Operating mode>: 3. Select Operating mode> Maintenance mode. The <Transmitted data> message is displayed. 4. Check that appears in the status bar.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 52/60 8.15.2 Blocking / Unblocking
The <Blocking> menu is available in the Maintenance mode. 1. Select Blocking > Unblocking / Blocking the line to unblock / block a line. Unblocking the line allows to restore communication between both DIP. A command can be transmitted to the remote unit. 2. Select Blocking > Unblocking / Blocking relay to unblock / block a relay. Unblocking a relay allows to restore the connection between the local DIP and the protection relays it is connected to. A command can be received locally. 3. The line status and relay status displayed in the upper bar are updated:
8.15.3
Loopback 1. Select Loopback > Local loopback deactivated to deactivate loopback. 2. Select Loopback > Local loopback activated to activate loopback. 3. The type of loopback displayed in the upper status bar is up to date:
8.15.4
Forcing
The forcing menus are available in maintenance mode from user 2 level.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.15.5 Transmitter forcing
CAUTION ! COMMANDS ARE LAUNCHED USING THIS FEATURE.
Prior conditions The active mode must be Operational User level 2. Procedure To force the transmitter: Select Forcing > Transmitter forcing. The following window opens:
1. Check the boxes matching the commands to be forced. 2. Click the button.
A warning message is displayed to report that local command restitutions are activated.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm.
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 54/60 8.15.6 Restitution forcing
This command allows to force the commands in order to check their operational status. To force the commands: Select> Forcing command reception. The following window opens.
Check the box matching the command to force. Click the button.
The Data transmitted message is displayed. If the relays are unblocked, the commands received are transmitted locally to the protection relay connected to the DIP. 8.15.7 Alarms forcing This command allows to force the alarms in order to check their operation. To force the alarms: Select Forcing > Alarms. The <Forcing alarms> window opens:
Check the Minor or Major box, or both, for alarms to be forced. Click the button.
The Data transmitted message is displayed. Check the alarms status LEDs and the associated switches on connector P16.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.15.8 Interface forcing Prior conditions The redundancy feature must be activated. User level 2. The mode must be <Maintenance>. Procedure
This command allows, when the redundancy function is activated, to switch from the optical interface to another digital interface, and vice versa. To switch from one interface to the other: 1. Select Maintenance> Interface. The following window opens:
The active interface is identified by a dot in the corresponding button. Click the button of the interface required. Click the button.
The following confirmation window opens:
Click the Yes button. The Data transmitted message is displayed. The DIP resets. After resetting, check that the switch was successful by selecting Maintenance> Interface, the active interface must have changed.
8.15.9
Reset This command allows clearing files of events, alarms or counters on a local or remote teleprotection unit. To clear the histories, select Clear histories> Local> Events or History> Local> Alarms.
The warning message <Are you sure ?> is displayed. Answer Yes. A confirmation of clearing events/alarms is displayed.
8.15.10 Resetting the DIP This command allows resetting the DIP in local in the <Operating mode>, in local and remote in the <Maintenance> mode. To reset the DIP, select Reset > Local or Reset> Remote. A message appears, confirming the reset.
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP 8.16 Expert Menu This command allows to block the oscillator.
This means time stamping to save the batteries in case of extended storage of the teleprotection. Restarting is performed simply by resetting the time of the DIP. See 8.14.2. NOTE: 8.17 The battery is used to save the time, events and alarms lists as well as command counters.
Reading the version of the HMI To read the software version of the HMI, select <?>: About. The following window opens:
8.18
Exit the HMI. To exit the HMI, click the submenu <Exit> in the <File> menu of the base screen.
9.
9.1
EXAMPLE OF REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION

Example description The following procedure describes the configuration of the redundancy function with main interface IR185, the redundancy interface IR180, the clock and a 10 ms delay.
9.2
Prior conditions IR185 and IR 180 must be installed in the DIP. Read the hardware configuration, by selecting Read> Local> Hardware configuration. The following window opens:
IR 180 and IR 182 must be present. 9.2.1.1 Configuration Select Read> Local>Configuration to open the configuration file. Select Modify> Comm. interface. The following window opens:
Human Machine Interface DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP Select IR185 in the scroll down menu. Click the button.
Select <Modify> Redundancy interface. The following window opens:
Select IR180 in the scroll down menu. Click the Trigger button. The following window opens:
. Adjust the delay before switching to place the cursor on 10 ms. Click the button.
Check that the configuration window was updated with the new parameter values:
DIP/EN HI/B23 Page 60/60 Comment on the switching delay:
The switching time can be set between 5 and 100 ms for each side. This means the total time measured is: Switching time = trip time Dip1 + trigger time Dip2 + about 8 ms for the communication of the Dip. This optical-electric switching redundancy procedure is automatic.
Alstom Grid
e-terragridcom DIP - ALSTOM 2010. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of ALSTOM. The other names mentioned, registered or not, are the property of their respective companies. The technical and other data contained in this document is provided for information only. Neither ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept responsibility for or should be taken as making any representation or warranty (whether express or implied) as to the accuracy or completeness of such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or change this data at any time without further notice. Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/ Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070
www.alstom.com

DIP User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIP User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

e-terragridcom DIP

User's Manual e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN U/C23 Page 1/2

DIP Teleprotection CONTENT

DIP/EN U/B23 Page 2/2

User's Manual e-terragridcom DIP

Overview e-terragridcom DIP

Overview e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN OS/A23 Page 1/6

DIP/EN OS/A23 Page 2/6

Overview e-terragridcom DIP

Overview e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN OS/A23 Page 3/6

DIP/EN OS/A23 Page 4/6

Overview e-terragridcom DIP

Overview e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN OS/A23 Page 5/6

DIP/EN OS/A23 Page 6/6

Overview e-terragridcom DIP

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 1/12

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR ALSTOM TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT

INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 2/12

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 3/12

HEALTH AND SAFETY

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 4/12

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING, AND SERVICING

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 5/12

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 6/12

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 7/12

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

circuits and earth and also between 6.4 Environment

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 8/12

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

SPECIFIC SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR DIP TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT

Alteration: alteration of the equipment is not allowed.

Mechanical installation: the equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 9/12

Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or from the equipment.

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 10/12

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 11/12

DIP/EN SS/A23 Page 12/12

Safety Section e-terragridcom DIP

General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP

General characteristics e-terragridcom DIP

DIP/EN IT/B23 Page 1/44

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS DEFINITIONS OVERVIEW DIP GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES